2009 saturn astra m - justgivemethedamnmanual.comcautions and notices a circle with a slash through...

Seats and Restraints ......... 1-1Front Seats .................... 1-2Rear Seats .................... 1-7Safety Belts ................... 1-8Airbag System .............. 1-24Child Restraints ............. 1-38

Keys, Doors andWindows ............................ 2-1

Keys ............................. 2-2Doors and Locks ............ 2-5Theft-Deterrent Systems ... 2-8Windows ...................... 2-10Mirrors ......................... 2-11Sunroof ........................ 2-12

Storage .............................. 3-1Storage ......................... 3-1

Instruments andControls ............................. 4-1

Instrument PanelOverview .................... 4-2

Warning Lights, Gages,and Indicators ............ 4-11

Driver InformationCenter (DIC) ............. 4-25

OnStar® System ............ 4-38

Lighting ............................. 5-1Lighting ......................... 5-1

Infotainment ...................... 6-1Audio System(s) ............. 6-1

Climate Controls ............... 7-1Climate Controls ............. 7-1

Driving and Operating ....... 8-1Starting and Operating

Your Vehicle ............... 8-2Driving Your Vehicle ...... 8-15Fuel ............................ 8-34

Vehicle Serviceand Care ............................ 9-1

Service .......................... 9-2Owner Checks ................ 9-4Headlamp Aiming .......... 9-26Bulb Replacement ......... 9-28Electrical System ........... 9-34

Tires ........................... 9-40Tire Changing ............... 9-60Jump Starting ............... 9-69Towing ........................ 9-73Appearance Care .......... 9-73

Technical Data ................. 10-1Vehicle Identification ...... 10-1Capacities and

Specifications ............ 10-2

Service andMaintenance ..................... 11-1

Service andMaintenance .............. 11-1

Customer Information ...... 12-1Customer Information ..... 12-1Reporting Safety

Defects ................... 12-14Vehicle Data Recording

and Privacy ............. 12-16

Index ................................... i-1

2009 Saturn ASTRA M

SATURN and the SATURN Emblemare registered trademarks, andthe name ASTRA is a trademark ofSaturn Corporation. GENERALMOTORS and GM are registeredtrademarks of General MotorsCorporation.

This manual includes the latestinformation at the time it wasprinted. Saturn reserves the right tomake changes after that timewithout further notice.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on yourspecific vehicle.

Read this manual from beginning toend to learn about the vehicle’sfeatures and controls. Pictures,symbols, and words work togetherto explain vehicle operation.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of thismanual can be obtained from yourdealer/retailer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123helminc.com

Propriétaires CanadiensOn peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès deconcessionnaire ou à l’adressesuivante:

Helm IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123helminc.com

IndexTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

ii Preface

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 25918346 A First Printing ©2008 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

Cautions and Notices

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this” or “Do not letthis happen.”

A box with the word CAUTION isused to tell about things thatcould hurt you or others if you wereto ignore the warning.

{ CAUTION

These mean there is somethingthat could hurt you or otherpeople.

Cautions tell what the hazard is andwhat to do to avoid or reduce thehazard. Read these cautions.

A notice tells about something thatcan damage the vehicle.

Notice: These mean there issomething that could damageyour vehicle.

Many times, this damage would notbe covered by the vehicle’swarranty, and it could be costly. Thenotice tells what to do to helpavoid the damage.

There are also warning labels onthe vehicle which use the samewords, CAUTION or Notice.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols insteadof text. Symbols are shown alongwith the text describing the operationor information relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gage, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

Preface iii

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

g : Audio Steering WheelControls or OnStar®

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gage

+ : Fuses

i : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

j : LATCH System Child Restraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

F : Traction Control

M : Windshield Washer Fluid

iv Preface

Seats andRestraints

Front SeatsManual Seats .....................1-2Seat Height Adjuster ...........1-2Lumbar Seat Adjustment ....1-3Reclining Seatbacks ...........1-3Head Restraints ..................1-5Heated Seats .....................1-6

Rear SeatsRear Seat Operation ...........1-7

Safety BeltsSafety Belts ........................1-8How to Wear SafetyBelts Properly ..................1-12

Lap-Shoulder Belt .............1-18Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy .......................1-22

Safety Belt Extender .........1-22Safety Belt Check .............1-22

Care of Safety Belts .........1-23Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts After aCrash ..............................1-23

Airbag SystemAirbag System ..................1-24Where Are the Airbags? ...1-26When Should an AirbagInflate? ............................1-27

What Makes an AirbagInflate? ............................1-28

How Does an AirbagRestrain? ........................1-28

What Will You See Afteran Airbag Inflates? ..........1-29

Passenger SensingSystem ............................1-30

Servicing YourAirbag-EquippedVehicle ............................1-35

Adding Equipment toYour Airbag-EquippedVehicle ............................1-36

Airbag System Check .......1-37Replacing Airbag SystemParts After a Crash .........1-37

Child RestraintsOlder Children ..................1-38Infants and YoungChildren ..........................1-40

Child Restraint Systems ....1-43Where to Put theRestraint .........................1-44

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH) ..........................1-46

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash ...........1-50

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat) .....................1-51

Securing Child Restraints(Right Front Seat) ...........1-53

Seats and Restraints 1-1

Front Seats

Manual Seats

{ CAUTION

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver’s seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push apedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver’s seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

To move a manual seat forward orrearward:

1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the bar.

Try to move the seat with your bodyto be sure the seat is locked in place.

Seat Height Adjuster

To raise and lower the manualseat, move the lever up or downrepeatedly until the seat is at thedesired height.

1-2 Seats and Restraints

Lumbar Seat Adjustment

On seats with this feature, turn theknob clockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease thelumbar support.

Reclining Seatbacks

{ CAUTION

You can lose control of the vehicleif you try to adjust the seat whilethe vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push apedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver’s seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

{ CAUTION

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even if when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job when reclined like this.

The shoulder belt cannot do its jobbecause it will not be against yourbody. Instead, it will be in front ofyou. In a crash, you could go intoit, receiving neck or other injuries.

The lap belt cannot do its jobeither. In a crash, the belt couldgo up over your abdomen.The belt forces would be there, notat your pelvic bones. This couldcause serious internal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.


To adjust a manual recliningseatback, turn the knob. Do not leanon the seatback while adjusting it.

Seatback Latches (Three DoorModel)For easy entry/exit to the rear seatson three door models:

1. Lift the lever, and tilt the seatbackforward.

2. Lower the lever and move theentire seat completely forward.

{ CAUTION

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

To return the seat to the uprightposition:

1. Remove any objects in front of orbehind the seat.

2. Move the entire seat rearward.

3. Lift the lever located on theoutboard side of the seatand return the seatback to theupright position.

4. Lower the lever then push andpull on the seatback to be sureit is locked in place.


Head RestraintsThe vehicle’s front seats haveadjustable head restraints.

{ CAUTION

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinalinjury in a crash. Do not driveuntil the head restraints for alloccupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so thatthe top of the restraint is at thesame height as the top of theoccupant’s head.

This position reduces the chance ofa neck injury in a crash.

To adjust the head restraint, pressthe button located on the sideof the head restraint. Pull up or pushdown on the restraint to adjust it.

Try to move the head restraint afterthe button is released to makesure that it is locked in place.

The vehicle’s front seat headrestraints are not designed to beremoved.


Active Head Restraint System

The vehicle has an active headrestraint system in the front seatingpositions.

These automatically tilt forward toreduce the risk of neck injury ifthe vehicle is hit from behind.

Rear Seat HeadrestsThe vehicle has headrests in allseating positions of the rear seats.The headrests in the rear outboardpositions adjust like the frontseat head restraints.

To adjust the headrest in the rearseat center position, pull up toraise it.

To lower the headrest, press thebuttons located on the top ofthe seatback and push the headrest down.

The vehicle’s rear seat headrestsare not designed to be removed.

Heated SeatsOn vehicles with heated front seats,the controls for each seat arelocated on the center of theinstrument panel. To operate theheated seats the ignition mustbe on.

M (Heated Seat): Press this buttonto turn on the heated seat.

The light on the button will come onto indicate that the feature isworking. Press the button to cyclethrough the temperature settingsof high, medium, and low and to turnthe heat to the seat off. The numberof indicator lights above the buttonwill show the level of heat selected:three for high, two for medium,and one for low.


Rear Seats

Rear Seat Operation

{ CAUTION

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

{ CAUTION

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached, ortwisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt couldbe seriously injured. After raisingthe rear seatback, always checkto be sure that the safety beltsare properly routed and attached,and are not twisted.

Folding the Seatback

Notice: Folding a rear seat withthe safety belts still fastened maycause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle thesafety belts and return them totheir normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.

Before folding the seatback down,the safety belt must be unbuckledand not in the storage clip.

The front seat must be moved allthe way forward, and not reclined.The headrest must be completelylowered.

To lower the seatback:

1. Press the button located on thetop of the seatback to release it.

2. Fold the seatback forward.


To return the seat to the sittingposition:

1. Make sure the safety belt isthrough the storage clip.

2. Lift the seatback and push itrearward until it is locked inthe sitting position.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

4. Remove the safety belt from thestorage clip.

The seatback must be locked or youwill not be able to pull out anduse the rear center safety belt.Always push and pull on theseatback to be sure it is locked.

Safety BeltsThis section of the manual describeshow to use safety belts properly.It also describes some things not todo with safety belts.

{ CAUTION

Do not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, the injuries can bemuch worse. You can hit thingsinside the vehicle harder or beejected from the vehicle. You andyour passenger(s) can beseriously injured or killed. In thesame crash, you might not be, ifyou are buckled up. Always fastenyour safety belt, and check thatyour passenger(s) are restrainedproperly too.


{ CAUTION

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision, peopleriding in these areas are morelikely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ridein any area of your vehicle that isnot equipped with seats andsafety belts. Be sure everyone inyour vehicle is in a seat and usinga safety belt properly.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 4-13 for additional information.

In most states and in all Canadianprovinces, the law requires wearingsafety belts. Here is why:

You never know if you will be in acrash. If you do have a crash,you do not know if it will be aserious one.

A few crashes are mild, and somecrashes can be so serious that evenbuckled up, a person would notsurvive. But most crashes arein between. In many of them, peoplewho buckle up can survive andsometimes walk away. Withoutsafety belts they could have beenbadly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safetybelts in vehicles, the facts are clear.In most crashes buckling up doesmatter... a lot!

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything,you go as fast as it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Supposeit is just a seat on wheels.


Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop thevehicle. The rider does not stop.

The person keeps going untilstopped by something. In a realvehicle, it could be the windshield...


or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down asthe vehicle does. You get moretime to stop. You stop over moredistance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is whysafety belts make such good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be — whether you arewearing a safety belt or not. Butyour chance of being consciousduring and after an accident,so you can unbuckle and get out,is much greater if you arebelted. And you can unbuckle asafety belt, even if you areupside down.


Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts — not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupantsstill have to buckle up to get themost protection. That is truenot only in frontal collisions, butespecially in side and othercollisions.

Q: If I am a good driver, and Inever drive far from home,why should I wear safetybelts?

A: You may be an excellent driver,but if you are in a crash — evenone that is not your fault — youand your passenger(s) can behurt. Being a good driver does notprotect you from things beyondyour control, such as bad drivers.

Most accidents occur within25 miles (40 km) of home. Andthe greatest number of seriousinjuries and deaths occur atspeeds of less than 40 mph(65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

Be aware that there are specialthings to know about safetybelts and children. And there aredifferent rules for smaller childrenand infants. If a child will be riding inthe vehicle, see Older Children onpage 1-38 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 1-40. Follow thoserules for everyone’s protection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

Occupants who are not buckled upcan be thrown out of the vehiclein a crash. And they can strikeothers in the vehicle who arewearing safety belts.


First, before you or yourpassenger(s) wear a safety belt,there is important informationyou should know.

Sit up straight and always keep yourfeet on the floor in front of you.The lap part of the belt should beworn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,

this applies force to the strongpelvic bones and you would be lesslikely to slide under the lap belt.If you slid under it, the belt wouldapply force on your abdomen.This could cause serious or evenfatal injuries. The shoulder beltshould go over the shoulderand across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to take beltrestraining forces.

The shoulder belt locks if there is asudden stop or crash.

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose.It will not give as muchprotection this way.

{ CAUTION

You can be seriously hurt if yourshoulder belt is too loose. In acrash, you would move forwardtoo much, which could increaseinjury. The shoulder belt should fitsnugly against your body.



A: The lap belt is too loose.It will not give nearly as muchprotection this way.

{ CAUTION

You can be seriously hurt if yourlap belt is too loose. In a crash,you could slide under the lap beltand apply force on your abdomen.This could cause serious or evenfatal injuries. The lap belt shouldbe worn low and snug on thehips, just touching the thighs.


A: The belt is buckled in the wrongbuckle.


{ CAUTION

You can be seriously injured ifyour belt is buckled in the wrongplace like this. In a crash, the beltwould go up over your abdomen.The belt forces would be there,not on the pelvic bones. Thiscould cause serious internalinjuries. Always buckle your beltinto the buckle nearest you.


A: The belt is over an armrest.

{ CAUTION

You can be seriously injured ifyour belt goes over an armrestlike this. The belt would be muchtoo high. In a crash, you can slideunder the belt. The belt forcewould then be applied on theabdomen, not on the pelvicbones, and that could causeserious or fatal injuries. Be surethe belt goes under the armrests.



A: The shoulder belt is worn underthe arm. It should be worn overthe shoulder at all times.

{ CAUTION

You can be seriously injured ifyou wear the shoulder belt underyour arm. In a crash, your bodywould move too far forward,which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, thebelt would apply too much forceto the ribs, which are not asstrong as shoulder bones.You could also severely injureinternal organs like your liver orspleen. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.


A: The belt is behind the body.


{ CAUTION

You can be seriously injured bynot wearing the lap-shoulder beltproperly. In a crash, you wouldnot be restrained by the shoulderbelt. Your body could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. You mightalso slide under the lap belt.The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.


A: The belt is twisted acrossthe body.

{ CAUTION

You can be seriously injured by atwisted belt. In a crash, you wouldnot have the full width of the beltto spread impact forces. If a beltis twisted, make it straight so itcan work properly, or ask yourdealer/retailer to fix it.


Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not letit get twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across youvery quickly. If this happens,let the belt go back slightlyto unlock it. Then pull the beltacross you more slowly.If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 1-22.Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you.See “Shoulder Belt HeightAdjustment” later in this sectionfor instructions on use andimportant safety information.

5. To make the lap part tight,pull up on the shoulder belt.


To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt should returnto its stowed position. When thesafety belt is not in use, slide thelatch plate up the safety beltwebbing.

Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height AdjusterThe vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver andright front passenger seatingposition.

Adjust the height so that theshoulder portion of the belt iscentered on the shoulder. The beltshould be away from the faceand neck, but not falling off theshoulder. Improper shoulderbelt height adjustment could reducethe effectiveness of the safetybelt in a crash.

To move it, squeeze the button onthe front of the height adjuster torelease the locking feature and movethe height adjuster to the desiredposition.

After the adjuster is set to thedesired position, try to move itdown without squeezing therelease button to make sure ithas locked into position.


Safety Belt PretensionersThe vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for the frontoccupants. Although thepretensioners cannot be seen,they are part of the safety beltassembly. They can help tightenthe safety belts during the earlystages of a moderate to severefrontal or near frontal crash ifthe threshold conditions forpretensioner activation are met.And, if the vehicle has side impactairbags, safety belt pretensionerscan help tighten the safety belts ina side crash.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,they will need to be replaced,and probably other new parts forthe vehicle’s safety belt system.See Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts After a Crash on page 1-23.

Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuidesRear shoulder belt comfort guidesmay provide added safety beltcomfort for older children who haveoutgrown booster seats and forsome adults. When installed on ashoulder belt, the comfort guidepositions the belt away fromthe neck and head.

There is one guide for eachoutboard passenger position in therear seat. Here is how to installa comfort guide to the safety belt:

1. Pull the elastic cord out from theside of the seatback to removethe guide from its storage pocket.

2. Place the guide over the belt andinsert the two edges of the beltinto the slots of the guide.


3. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. The elasticcord must be under the beltand the guide on top.

{ CAUTION

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt couldbe seriously injured. The shoulder

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

belt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and releasethe safety belt as describedpreviously in this section.Make sure that the shoulder beltcrosses the shoulder.

To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the safety belt canbe removed from the guide.Push the guide into the pocket onthe side of seatback.

Properly secure the guide loopbefore folding the seatback.The comfort guide and vehicle canbe damaged while closing adoor if it is not properly secured inits storage location.


Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likelyto be seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lap portionshould be worn as low as possible,below the rounding, throughoutthe pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When asafety belt is worn properly, it ismore likely that the fetus will not behurt in a crash. For pregnantwomen, as for anyone, the key tomaking safety belts effective iswearing them properly.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the safety belt will fasten aroundyou, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer/retailer willorder you an extender. When yougo in to order it, take the heaviestcoat you will wear, so the extenderwill be long enough for you.To help avoid personal injury, donot let someone else use it, and useit only for the seat it is made to fit.The extender has been designed foradults. Never use it for securingchild seats. To wear it, attach it tothe regular safety belt. For moreinformation, see the instructionsheet that comes with the extender.

Safety Belt CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors andanchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job. See yourdealer/retailer to have it repaired.Torn or frayed safety belts may notprotect you in a crash. They canrip apart under impact forces.If a belt is torn or frayed, get a newone right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 4-13 for moreinformation.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Care of Safety Belts onpage 1-23.


Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{ CAUTION

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them.In a crash, they might not be ableto provide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts Aftera Crash

{ CAUTION

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assembliesthat were used during any crashmay have been stressed ordamaged. See your dealer/retailerto have the safety belt assembliesinspected or replaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used atthe time of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been ina crash, or if the airbag readinesslight stays on after you startthe vehicle or while you are driving.See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 4-14.


Airbag SystemYour vehicle has the followingairbags:

• A frontal airbag for the driver.

• A frontal airbag for the right frontpassenger.

• A seat-mounted side impactairbag for the driver.

• A seat-mounted side impactairbag for the right frontpassenger.

• A roof-rail airbag for the driverand the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver.

• A roof-rail airbag for the rightfront passenger and thepassenger seated directly behindthe right front passenger.

All of the airbags in your vehicle willhave the word AIRBAG embossedin the trim or on an attachedlabel near the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the middlepart of the steering wheel forthe driver and on the instrumentpanel for the right front passenger.

With seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAGwill appear on the side of theseatback closest to the door.

With roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear along theheadliner or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today’s airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force ofan inflating bag, all airbags mustinflate very quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ CAUTION

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt — even ifyou have airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, but do not replace them.Also, airbags are not designed todeploy in every crash. In somecrashes safety belts are your onlyrestraint. See When Should anAirbag Inflate? on page 1-27.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce your chanceof hitting things inside the vehicleor being ejected from it. Airbagsare “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. Everyone in yourvehicle should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there isan airbag for that person.


{ CAUTION

Airbags inflate with great force,faster than the blink of an eye.Anyone who is up against, or veryclose to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injured orkilled. Do not sit unnecessarilyclose to the airbag, as you wouldbe if you were sitting on the edgeof your seat or leaning forward.Safety belts help keep you inposition before and during acrash. Always wear your safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ CAUTION

Children who are up against, orvery close to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injured orkilled. Airbags plus lap-shoulderbelts offer protection for adultsand older children, but not foryoung children and infants.Neither the vehicle’s safety beltsystem nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Young childrenand infants need the protectionthat a child restraint system canprovide. Always secure childrenproperly in your vehicle. To readhow, see Older Children onpage 1-38 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 1-40.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel cluster,which shows the airbag symbol.The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 4-14 formore information.


Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in themiddle of the steering wheel.

The right front passenger frontalairbag is in the instrument panel onthe passenger’s side.

The seat-mounted side impactairbags for the driver and right frontpassenger are in the side of theseatbacks closest to the door.

The roof-rail airbags for the driver,right front passenger, and secondrow outboard passengers are in theceiling above the side windows.

{ CAUTION

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properly orit might force the object into thatperson causing severe injury oreven death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessories thatblock the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.

Driver Side shown, PassengerSide similar


When Should an AirbagInflate?Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries mainly to the driver’s or rightfront passenger’s head and chest.However, they are only designed toinflate if the impact exceeds apredetermined deploymentthreshold. Deployment thresholdsare used to predict how severea crash is likely to be in time for theairbags to inflate and help restrainthe occupants.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based onhow fast your vehicle is traveling.It depends largely on what youhit, the direction of the impact,and how quickly your vehicleslows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds. For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationaryobject, the airbags could inflate ata different crash speed than if thevehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object thatdeforms, the airbags could inflateat a different crash speed than ifthe vehicle hits an object thatdoes not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object(like a pole), the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a wideobject (like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an objectat an angle, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle goes straightinto the object.

Thresholds can also vary withspecific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasdual-stage frontal airbags.Dual-stage airbags adjust therestraint according to crash severity.The vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensingsystem distinguish between amoderate frontal impact and a moresevere frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, dual-stage airbagsinflate at a level less than fulldeployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs.


The vehicle has seat-mountedside impact and roof-rail airbags.See Airbag System on page 1-24.Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags are intendedto inflate in moderate to severeside crashes. Seat-mountedside impact and roof-rail airbags willinflate if the crash severity is abovethe system’s designed thresholdlevel. The threshold level can varywith specific vehicle design.

Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags are not intended toinflate in frontal impacts, near-frontalimpacts, rollovers, or rear impacts.A seat-mounted side impact airbag isintended to deploy on the side of thevehicle that is struck. A roof-railairbag is intended to deploy on theside of the vehicle that is struck.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag shouldhave inflated simply because of thedamage to a vehicle or becauseof what the repair costs were.

For frontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits,the angle of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.For seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags, deployment isdetermined by the locationand severity of the side impact.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fillsthe airbag causing the bag tobreak out of the cover and deploy.The inflator, the airbag, andrelated hardware are all part of theairbag module.

Frontal airbag modules are locatedinside the steering wheel andinstrument panel. For vehicles withseat-mounted side impact airbags,there are airbag modules in the sideof the front seatbacks closest to

the door. For vehicles with roof-railairbags, there are airbag modulesin the ceiling of the vehicle, near theside windows that have occupantseating positions.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel.In moderate to severe sidecollisions, even belted occupantscan contact the inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Frontalairbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over theoccupant’s upper body, stoppingthe occupant more gradually.Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags distribute the forceof the impact more evenly over theoccupant’s upper body.


But airbags would not help inmany types of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant’s motionis not toward those airbags.See When Should an Airbag Inflate?on page 1-27 for more information.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.

What Will You See Afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time afterthey deploy. Some components ofthe airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbag modules, see What Makes anAirbag Inflate? on page 1-28.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out ofthe windshield or being able tosteer the vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ CAUTION

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannot getout of the vehicle after an airbaginflates, then get fresh air byopening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors,turn the interior lamps on, and turnthe hazard warning flashers onwhen the airbags inflate. You canlock the doors, turn the interiorlamps off, and turn the hazardwarning flashers off by using thecontrols for those features.


In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshieldsare broken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakagemay also occur from the right frontpassenger airbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflateonly once. After an airbaginflates, you will need somenew parts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be there tohelp protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor your vehicle covers theneed to replace other parts.

• The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after a crash.See Vehicle Data Recordingand Privacy on page 12-16 andEvent Data Recorders onpage 12-16.

• Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will notwork properly. See yourdealer/retailer for service.

Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passengersensing system for the right frontpassenger position. The passengerairbag status indicator will bevisible in the rearview mirror whenthe vehicle is started.

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbol for on and off, will be visibleduring the system check. When thesystem check is complete, eitherthe word ON or OFF, or the symbolfor on or off, will be visible. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 4-15.

United States

Canada


The passenger sensing system willturn off the right front passengerfrontal airbag and seat-mounted sideimpact airbag under certainconditions. The driver airbags arenot affected by the passengersensing system.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe right front passenger’s seat.The sensors are designed to detectthe presence of a properly-seatedoccupant and determine if theright front passenger frontal airbagand seat-mounted side impactairbag should be enabled (mayinflate) or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

We recommend that children besecured in a rear seat, including: aninfant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a childriding in a forward-facing child seat;an older child riding in a boosterseat; and children, who arelarge enough, using safety belts.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the riskto the rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ CAUTION

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured orkilled if the right front passengerairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in a

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

forward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if theright front passenger airbaginflates and the passenger seat isin a forward position.Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag(if equipped), no system isfail-safe. No one can guaranteethat an airbag will not deploy undersome unusual circumstance,even though the airbag(s) are off.Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if theairbag(s) are off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint in theright front seat, always move thefront passenger seat as far back asit will go. It is better to secure thechild restraint in a rear seat.


The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag if:

• The right front passenger seatis unoccupied.

• The system determines that aninfant is present in a rear-facinginfant seat.

• The system determines that asmall child is present in achild restraint.

• The system determines that asmall child is present in abooster seat.

• A right front passenger takeshis/her weight off of the seatfor a period of time.

• The right front passenger seat isoccupied by a smaller person,such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

• Or, if there is a critical problemwith the airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag,the off indicator will light and stay litto remind you that the airbagsare off. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 4-15.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on (may inflate) theright front passenger frontal airbagand seat-mounted side impactairbag anytime the system sensesthat a person of adult size issitting properly in the right frontpassenger seat. When thepassenger sensing system hasallowed the airbags to be enabled,the on indicator will light andstay lit to remind you that theairbags are active.

For some children who haveoutgrown child restraints and for verysmall adults, the passenger sensingsystem may or may not turn off theright front passenger frontal airbag

and seat-mounted side impactairbag, depending upon the person’sseating posture and body build.Everyone in the vehicle who hasoutgrown child restraints should weara safety belt properly — whether ornot there is an airbag for that person.

{ CAUTION

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrong withthe airbag system. To help avoidinjury to yourself or others, havethe vehicle serviced right away.See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 4-14 for more information,including important safetyinformation.


If the On Indicator is Lit for aChild RestraintIf a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directionsprovided by the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints(Rear Seat) on page 1-51 orSecuring Child Restraints(Right Front Seat) on page 1-53.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is still lit,turn the vehicle off. Thenslightly recline the vehicleseatback and adjust the seatcushion, if adjustable, tomake sure that the vehicleseatback is not pushing the childrestraint into the seat cushion.Also make sure the child restraintis not trapped under the vehiclehead restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.

6. Restart the vehicle.If the on indicator is still lit,secure the child in the childrestraint in a rear seat position inthe vehicle, and check withyour dealer/retailer.

If the Off Indicator is Lit for anAdult-Size Occupant

If a person of adult-size is sitting inthe right front passenger seat,but the off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat.


If this happens, use the followingsteps to allow the system to detectthat person and enable the rightfront passenger frontal airbagand seat-mounted side impactairbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after theon indicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem OperationSafety belts help keep the passengerin position on the seat during vehiclemaneuvers and braking, which helpsthe passenger sensing systemmaintain the passenger airbagstatus. See “Safety Belts” and “ChildRestraints” in the Index for additionalinformation about the importance ofproper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion, oraftermarket equipment such as seatcovers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend that younot use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipmentto Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 1-36 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.

A wet seat can affect theperformance of the passengersensing system. Here is how:• The passenger sensing system

may turn off the passenger airbagwhen liquid is soaked into theseat. If this happens, the offindicator will be lit, and the airbagreadiness light on the instrumentpanel will also be lit.

• Liquid pooled on the seat that hasnot soaked in may make it morelikely that the passenger sensingsystem will enable (turn on) thepassenger airbag while a childrestraint or child occupant is onthe seat. If the passenger airbagis turned on, the on indicatorwill be lit.

If the passenger seat gets wet,dry the seat immediately. If theairbag readiness light is lit,do not install a child restraint orallow anyone to occupy the seat.


See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 4-14 for important safetyinformation.

The on indicator may be lit if anobject, such as a briefcase,handbag, grocery bag, laptop orother electronic device, is put onan unoccupied seat. If this isnot desired, remove the object fromthe seat.

{ CAUTION

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing YourAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle.Your dealer/retailer and theservice manual have informationabout servicing the vehicle and theairbag system. To purchase aservice manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 12-15.

{ CAUTION

For up to 10 seconds after theignition is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.


Adding Equipment toYour Airbag-EquippedVehicleQ: Is there anything I might add to

or change about the vehiclethat could keep the airbagsfrom working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things thatchange the vehicle’s frame,bumper system, height, front endor side sheet metal, they maykeep the airbag system fromworking properly. Changing ormoving any parts of the frontseats, safety belts, the airbagsensing and diagnostic module,steering wheel, instrumentpanel, roof-rail airbag modules,ceiling headliner or pillargarnish trim, front sensors, orairbag wiring can affect theoperation of the airbag system.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for theright front passenger position,which includes sensors that arepart of the passenger’s seat.The passenger sensing systemmay not operate properly if theoriginal seat trim is replaced withnon-GM covers, upholstery ortrim, or with GM covers,upholstery or trim designed for adifferent vehicle. Any object, suchas an aftermarket seat heater or acomfort enhancing pad or device,installed under or on top of theseat fabric, could also interferewith the operation of thepassenger sensing system.

This could either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent thepassenger sensing systemfrom properly turning offthe passenger airbag(s).See Passenger SensingSystem on page 1-30.

If you have any questions, callCustomer Assistance. The phonenumbers and addresses forCustomer Assistance are inStep Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in thismanual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure onpage 12-1.


Q: Because I have a disability,I have to get my vehiclemodified. How can I find outwhether this will affect myairbag system?

A: If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. The phonenumbers and addresses forCustomer Assistance arein Step Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure inthis manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure onpage 12-1.

In addition, your dealer/retailerand the service manual haveinformation about the location ofthe airbag sensors, sensing anddiagnostic module and airbag wiring.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenanceor replacement. Make sure theairbag readiness light is working.See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 4-14 for more information.

Notice: If an airbag coveringis damaged, opened, or broken,the airbag may not work properly.Do not open or break the airbagcoverings. If there are any openedor broken airbag covers, havethe airbag covering and/or airbagmodule replaced. For thelocation of the airbag modules,see What Makes an AirbagInflate? on page 1-28. See yourdealer/retailer for service.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts After a Crash

{ CAUTION

A crash can damage theairbag systems in your vehicle.A damaged airbag system maynot work properly and may notprotect you and your passenger(s)in a crash, resulting in seriousinjury or even death. To helpmake sure your airbag systemsare working properly after a crash,have them inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If an airbag inflates, you will needto replace airbag system parts.See your dealer/retailer for service.If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly.Have the vehicle serviced right away.See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 4-14 for more information.


Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle’s safety belts.

The manufacturer’s instructions thatcome with the booster seat, statethe weight and height limitations forthat booster. Use a booster seatwith a lap-shoulder belt untilthe child passes the below fit test:

• Sit all the way back on theseat. Do the knees bend at theseat edge? If yes, continue.If no, return to the booster seat.

• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest on theshoulder? If yes, continue. If no,try using the rear safety beltcomfort guide. See “Rear SafetyBelt Comfort Guides” underLap-Shoulder Belt on page 1-18for more information. If theshoulder belt still does not rest onthe shoulder, then return to thebooster seat.

• Does the lap belt fit low and snugon the hips, touching the thighs?If yes, continue. If no, return to thebooster seat.

• Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no, returnto the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force tothe child’s pelvic bones in acrash. It should never be wornover the abdomen, whichcould cause severe or even fatalinternal injuries in a crash.


Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belton page 1-18.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safetybelts properly.

{ CAUTION

Never do this.

Never allow two children to wearthe same safety belt. The safetybelt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the twochildren can be crushed togetherand seriously injured. A safetybelt must be used by only oneperson at a time.


{ CAUTION

Never do this.

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly.In a crash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.

Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law inevery state in the United States andin every Canadian province sayschildren up to some age mustbe restrained while in a vehicle.

{ CAUTION

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and neverallow children to play with thesafety belts.

Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offerprotection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young childrenand infants. Neither the vehicle’ssafety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them.Every time infants and youngchildren ride in vehicles, they shouldhave the protection provided byappropriate child restraints.


Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people, orcan be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ CAUTION

Never do this.

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg)infant will suddenly become a240 lb (110 kg) force on aperson’s arms. An infant shouldbe secured in an appropriaterestraint.

{ CAUTION

Never do this.

Children who are up against, orvery close to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injured orkilled. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing child

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

restraint in a rear seat. It is alsobetter to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in a rear seat. If youmust secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat,always move the front passengerseat as far back as it will go.


Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which arepurchased by the vehicle’sowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child’sweight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint will becompatible with the motor vehiclein which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be used in amotor vehicle. If it is, the restraintwill have a label saying that itmeets federal motor vehiclesafety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’sinstructions that come with therestraint state the weightand height limitations for aparticular child restraint.In addition, there are manykinds of restraints available forchildren with special needs.

{ CAUTION

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. This isbecause an infant’s neck is notfully developed and its headweighs so much compared withthe rest of its body. In a crash,an infant in a rear-facing childrestraint settles into the restraint,so the crash forces can bedistributed across the strongestpart of an infant’s body, the backand shoulders. Infants shouldalways be secured in rear-facingchild restraints.

{ CAUTION

A young child’s hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle’s regularsafety belt may not remain lowon the hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child’s abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.


Child Restraint Systems

A rear-facing infant seat (A) providesrestraint with the seating surfaceagainst the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts to keepthe infant positioned in the restraint.

A forward-facing child seat (B)provides restraint for the child’sbody with the harness.

A booster seat (C) is a childrestraint designed to improve the fitof the vehicle’s safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.

(A) Rear-Facing Infant Seat

(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat (C) Booster Seats


Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ CAUTION

A child can be seriously injuredor killed in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle’s safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, or bythe LATCH system. See Lower

Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 1-46 for moreinformation. A child can beendangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly securedin the vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructions thatcome with the restraint which maybe on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move aroundin a collision or sudden stopand injure people in the vehicle.Be sure to properly secure anychild restraint in the vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ CAUTION

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the child properlyfollowing the instructions thatcame with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a child restraintsystem or infant restraint systemsecured in a rear seating position.

We recommend that children andchild restraints be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a childriding in a rear-facing child restraint;


a child riding in a forward-facing childseat; an older child riding in a boosterseat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.

A label on the sun visor says, “Neverput a rear-facing child restraint in thefront.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if theairbag deploys.

{ CAUTION

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured orkilled if the right front passengerairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if theright front passenger airbaginflates and the passenger seat isin a forward position.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 1-30 for additionalinformation.

When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it is compatiblewith this vehicle.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure thechild restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured childrestraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no childis in it.


Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH)The LATCH system holds a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.This system is designed to makeinstallation of a child restraint easier.The LATCH system uses anchorsin the vehicle and attachmentson the child restraint that are madefor use with the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatiblechild restraint is properly installedusing the anchors, or use thevehicle’s safety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with that restraint,and also the instructions in thismanual. When installing a childrestraint with a top tether, you mustalso use either the lower anchorsor the safety belts to properly securethe child restraint. A child restraintmust never be installed usingonly the top tether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH systemin your vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraintmanufacturer will provide you withinstructions on how to use the childrestraint and its attachments.The following explains how toattach a child restraint with theseattachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There aretwo lower anchors for each LATCHseating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (B).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors thetop of the child restraint to thevehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tetherattachment (B) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchorin the vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotationof the child restraint during drivingor in a crash.


Your child restraint may havea single tether (A) or a dualtether (C). Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the toptether to the anchor.

Some child restraints with toptethers are designed for use with orwithout the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached.In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tetherbe attached. Be sure to read andfollow the instructions for yourchild restraint.

If the child restraint does not have atop tether, one can be obtained,in kit form, for many child restraints.Ask the child restraint manufacturerwhether or not a kit is available.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

i (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor): Seating positionswith two lower anchors.

To assist you in locating the loweranchors, each seating positionwith lower anchors has two labels,near the crease between theseatback and the seat cushion.

If the top tether anchors arecovered, the top tether anchorsymbol will be located on the coverto assist you in locating them.

Rear Seat


The top tether anchors are locatedon the seatback for each rear seatingposition. Be sure to use an anchorlocated on the same side of thevehicle as the seating position wherethe child restraint will be placed.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchor ifa national or local law requires thatthe top tether be attached, or if theinstructions that come with the childrestraint say that the top tether mustbe attached. There is no place toattach the top tether in this position.

Accident statistics show thatchildren are safer if they arerestrained in the rear rather than thefront seat. See Where to Put theRestraint on page 1-44 for additionalinformation.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ CAUTION

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injuredor killed. Install a LATCH-typechild restraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle’ssafety belts to secure the restraint,following the instructions that camewith the child restraint and theinstructions in this manual.

{ CAUTION

Do not attach more than onechild restraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachment tocome loose or even break duringa crash. A child or others couldbe injured. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, attach only one childrestraint per anchor.

{ CAUTION

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues to

(Continued)


CAUTION (Continued)

tighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way outof the retractor to set the lock, ifyour vehicle has one, after thechild restraint has been installed.

Notice: Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lower attachmentsor the desired seating positiondoes not have lower anchors,secure the child restraint with thetop tether and the safety belts.Refer to your child restraintmanufacturer instructions and theinstructions in this manual.1.1. Find the lower anchors for

the desired seating position.1.2. Put the child restraint on

the seat.1.3. Attach and tighten the

lower attachments on thechild restraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor, if equipped. Refer to thechild restraint instructions and thefollowing steps:2.1. Find the top tether anchor.2.2. If the anchor is covered,

open the cover to exposethe anchor.


2.3. Route, attach, and tightenthe top tether according toyour child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestor head restraint and you areusing a dual tether, route thetether around the headrest orhead restraint.

If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestor head restraint andyou are using a singletether, raise the headrest orhead restraint and routethe tether under theheadrest or head restraintand in between the headrestor head restraint posts.

3. Push and pull the child restraintin different directions to be sureit is secure.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ CAUTION

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint, resultingin serious injury or even death ina crash. To help make sure theLATCH system is workingproperly after a crash, see yourdealer/retailer to have the systeminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If the vehicle has the LATCHsystem and it was being usedduring a crash, new LATCH systemparts may be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.


Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat)When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with yourchild restraint to make sure itis compatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCH)on page 1-46 for how and where toinstall your child restraint usingLATCH. If a child restraint is securedin the vehicle using a safety beltand it uses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 1-46 for top tetheranchor locations.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tetheranchor if a national or local lawrequires that the top tether beanchored, or if the instructions thatcome with the child restraint saythat the top strap must be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tetherbe attached.

If the child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will be usingthe safety belt to secure the childrestraint in this position. Be sure tofollow the instructions that camewith the child restraint. Secure thechild in the child restraint whenand as the instructions say.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in therear seat, be sure to read Where toPut the Restraint on page 1-44.

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, andrun the lap and shoulder portionsof the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint.The child restraint instructionswill show you how.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.


4. Pull the rest of the shoulder beltall the way out of the retractor toset the lock.

5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of thebelt, and feed the shoulderbelt back into the retractor. Wheninstalling a forward-facing childrestraint, it may be helpful to useyour knee to push down onthe child restraint as you tightenthe belt.

6. If your child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer’s instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCH)on page 1-46 for moreinformation.


To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.


Securing Child Restraints(Right Front Seat)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to securea forward-facing child restraint.See Where to Put the Restraint onpage 1-44.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the rightfront passenger frontal andseat-mounted side impact airbagunder certain conditions. SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 1-30 and Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 4-15for more information, includingimportant safety information.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the riskto the rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ CAUTION

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint in theright front seat, always move thefront passenger seat as far back asit will go. It is better to secure thechild restraint in a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 1-30 for additionalinformation.


If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCH)on page 1-46 for how and where toinstall the child restraint usingLATCH. If a child restraint is securedin the seating position using asafety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCH) on page 1-46for top tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat ina position without a top tetheranchor if a national or locallaw requires that the top tether beanchored, or if the instructionsthat come with the child restraintsay that the top strap must beanchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tetherbe attached.

You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraintin this position. Follow theinstructions that came with thechild restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off theright front passenger frontal andseat-mounted side impactairbag, the off indicator on thepassenger airbag status indicatorshould light and stay lit whenyou start the vehicle. SeePassenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 4-15.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint.The child restraint instructionswill show you how.

4. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.


5. Pull the rest of the shoulder beltall the way out of the retractor toset the lock.

6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of thebelt and feed the shoulderbelt back into the retractor.When installing a forward-facingchild restraint, it may behelpful to use your knee to pushdown on the child restraint asyou tighten the belt.


If the airbags are off, the offindicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator will come onand stay on when the vehicle isstarted.

If a child restraint has beeninstalled and the on indicator is lit,see “If the On Indicator is Lit fora Child Restraint” under PassengerSensing System on page 1-30for more information.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.


✍ NOTES


Keys, Doors andWindows

KeysKeys ...................................2-2Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System ...................2-3

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation ...2-4

Doors and LocksDoor Locks .........................2-5Power Door Locks ..............2-6Rear Door SecurityLocks ................................2-6

Liftgate ...............................2-6

Theft-Deterrent SystemsTheft-Deterrent Systems .....2-8Immobilizer .........................2-8Immobilizer Operation .........2-8Content Theft-Deterrent ......2-9

WindowsWindows ...........................2-10Power Windows ................2-10Sun Visors ........................2-11

MirrorsManual Rearview Mirror ....2-11Outside Mirror(s) ...............2-11Outside Power Mirror(s) ....2-12

SunroofSunroof .............................2-12

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1

Keys

{ CAUTION

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous formany reasons, children or otherscould be badly injured or evenkilled. They could operate thepower windows or other controlsor even make the vehicle move.The windows will function with thekeys in the ignition and childrencould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keys ina vehicle with children.

The key, located in the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, isused for the ignition and all locks.

Press the button on the RKEtransmitter to extend the key.Press the button and the key bladeto retract the key.

When a new vehicle is delivered,a key number is included inthe vehicle documents.

Each key number tells yourdealer/retailer or a qualifiedlocksmith how to make extra keys.Keep this number in a safeplace. If you lose your keys, you willbe able to have one made easilyusing this number. If you needa new key, go to your dealer/retailerfor the correct key code.

2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows

Notice: If you ever lock yourkeys in the vehicle, you may haveto damage the vehicle to get in.Be sure you have spare keys.

If you are locked out of your vehicle,contact Roadside Assistance orOnStar. See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 12-6 or OnStar®

System on page 4-38.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)system operates on a radiofrequency subject to FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)Rules and with Industry Canada.

This device complies withPart 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:

1. This device may not causeinterference.

2. This device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada.Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:



Changes or modifications to thissystem by other than an authorizedservice facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range, try this:

• Check the distance. Thetransmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle. Stand closerduring rainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal. Take a fewsteps to the left or right, holdthe transmitter higher, andtry again.

• Check the transmitter’s battery.See “Battery Replacement”later in this section.

• If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer/retailer or a qualifiedtechnician for service.


Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation

c (Lock): Press to lock the doors,liftgate and fuel tank door.

If the driver door is open, the doorswill not lock.

d (Unlock): Press to unlock thedoors, liftgate and fuel tank door.

Press and hold d to lower allthe windows.

Programming Transmitters tothe VehicleOnly RKE transmitters programmedto this vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer/retailer. When the replacementtransmitter is programmed to thisvehicle, all remaining transmittersmust also be reprogrammed.Any lost or stolen transmitters will nolonger work once the new transmitteris programmed. Each vehicle canhave up to five transmittersprogrammed to it.

Battery ReplacementReplace the battery if the RemoteControl Battery check messageappears in the DIC. See “RemoteControl Battery Check” underDIC Warnings and Messages(Base and Uplevel Systems) onpage 4-36.

Notice: When replacing thebattery, do not touch any of thecircuitry on the transmitter.Static from your body coulddamage the transmitter.

To replace the battery:

1. Extend the key. See Keyson page 2-2 for additionalinformation.


2. Open the RKE transmitter.

3. Remove the old battery. Do notuse a metal object.

4. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing up. Replace with aCR2032 or equivalent battery.

5. Close the RKE transmitter.

SynchronizationAfter changing the battery,turn the ignition to ON/RUN.This synchronizes the key.

Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{ CAUTION

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

• Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will notopen it. You increase thechance of being thrown out ofthe vehicle in a crash if thedoors are not locked. So,wear safety belts properlyand lock the doors wheneveryou drive.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

• Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanentinjuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lockyour vehicle whenever youleave it.

• Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopyour vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent thisfrom happening.

To manually lock or unlock yourvehicle, use the key in the driver’sdoor from the outside to unlockit. When the driver door is openedthe entire vehicle is unlocked. Thereare also window sill knobs thatunlock each door from the inside.


Power Door LocksThe power door lock switch islocated on the instrument panel.

T (Door Lock): Press to lock thedoors, liftgate, and the fuel tankdoor. The button will illuminate whenlocked. Press again to unlock.

If the driver’s door is not closedproperly, the power door lock switchwill not lock the doors.

When the vehicle has beenunlocked, the key is not in theignition, and no door is opened thevehicle will automatically lockitself again after one minute.

Rear Door Security LocksYour vehicle has rear door securitylocks to prevent passengers fromopening the rear doors from theinside.

Open the rear doors to access thesecurity locks on the inside edgeof each door.

To set the locks, insert a key intothe slot and turn it to the horizontalposition. The door can only beopened from the outside with thedoor unlocked. To return the door tonormal operation, turn the slot tothe vertical position.

Liftgate

{ CAUTION

Exhaust gases may enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate, trunk/hatch open, or withany objects that pass through theseal between the body and thetrunk/hatch or liftgate. Engineexhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:

• Close all of the windows.• Fully open the air outlets on

or under the instrumentpanel.

(Continued)


CAUTION (Continued)

• Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air andset the fan speed to thehighest setting. See ClimateControl System in the Index.

• If the vehicle is equipped witha power liftgate, disable thepower liftgate function.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 8-14.

Notice: If you open the liftgatewithout checking for overheadobstructions such as a garagedoor, you could damage theliftgate or the liftgate glass.Always check to make sure thearea above and behind the liftgateis clear before opening it.

Press the touchpad located in thehandle of the liftgate and lift upto open.

Use the inside pull handle to lowerand close the liftgate.

Do not press the touchpad whileclosing the liftgate. This willcause the liftgate to be unlatched.

Always close the liftgate beforedriving.


Theft-DeterrentSystemsVehicle theft is big business,especially in some cities.This vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures, however, they do notmake it impossible to steal.

ImmobilizerThis device complies withPart 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:


2. This device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation.

This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada.Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:




Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system is automatically armedwhen the key is removed fromthe ignition.

The system is automaticallydisarmed when the key is turned toON/RUN.

You do not have to manually arm ordisarm the system.

The service vehicle soon light,located in the instrument panelcluster, comes on if there isa problem with arming or disarmingthe theft-deterrent system.

The key uses a transponder thatmatches an immobilizer control unitin the vehicle. Only the correctkey starts the vehicle.

When starting the vehicle, theservice vehicle soon light comes onbriefly when the ignition is turned on.


If the engine does not start and theservice vehicle soon light flashesthere is a problem with the system.Turn the ignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start andthe service vehicle soon lightcontinues to flash, try another key.

If the engine still does not startwith the other key, the vehicle needsservice. If the vehicle does start,the first key may be damaged.See your dealer/retailer who canservice the theft-deterrent systemand have a new key made.

In an emergency, contact RoadsideService. See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 12-6.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates the theftdeterrent system in the vehicle.

Content Theft-DeterrentThis vehicle has a contenttheft-deterrent alarm system.

The security light is located on theinstrument panel.

Do not use this system if there arepeople in the vehicle. The doorscan not be unlocked from inside thevehicle.

Arming the SystemTo arm the system:1. Close all doors, windows, hood

and sunroof.2. Press c on the Remote Keyless

Entry (RKE) transmitter.

The security light flashes when thevehicle is armed.

Disarming the SystemTo disarm the system, do one of thefollowing:• Press d on the RKE transmitter.• Turn the ignition on.

The security light stays on forapproximately one second when thevehicle is disarming.

How the System Alarm isActivatedTo activate the system if it is armed,open any door, the liftgate or hood.The horn will sound and thehazard warning flashers will flash.

How to Turn Off the SystemAlarmTo turn off the system alarm, doone of the following:• Press the unlock button on the

RKE transmitter.• Insert the key in the ignition and

turn it on.

The theft-deterrent system isdisarmed when the alarm isturned off.


Windows

{ CAUTION

Leaving children, helpless adults,or pets in a vehicle with thewindows closed is dangerous.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Never leave achild, a helpless adult, or a petalone in a vehicle, especially withthe windows closed in warm orhot weather.

Power Windows

{ CAUTION

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe keys is dangerous for manyreasons, children or others couldbe badly injured or even killed.They could operate the powerwindows or other controls oreven make the vehicle move.The windows will function andthey could be seriously injured orkilled if caught in the path of aclosing window. Do not leavekeys in a vehicle with children.

When there are children in therear seat use the window lockoutbutton to prevent unintentionaloperation of the windows.

The window switches are located oneach of the doors.

To lower a window, press the switchdown. To raise a window, pull theswitch up.

Express-Down WindowThis feature is on all windows.It allows you to lower the windowall the way without holding theswitch down.


Press the front of the switch to thesecond position and release. If youwant to stop the window as it islowering, briefly pull up the switch.

Press and hold the unlock button onthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter to lower all of thewindows from outside the vehicle.

Window Lockout

o (Window Lockout): This buttonis located on the driver’s doorarmrest. Slide the switch forwardto turn the lockout feature on.The rear windows can only beopened or closed by the driverwindow switches. The light on thebutton indicates the feature is in use.Press again to turn off.

Sun VisorsPull the visor toward you, or move itto the side to help reduce glare.

To use the lighted mirror, liftthe cover.

Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorHold the mirror in the center to moveit for a clearer view of behind yourvehicle.

Headlamp GlareTo reduce headlamp glare fromvehicles following from behind, pullthe lever toward you. Push thelever forward after the vehicle glareis gone, to return the mirror backto the original position.

Vehicles with OnStar® have threeadditional control buttons locatedat the bottom of the mirror.See your dealer/retailer for moreinformation on the system andhow to subscribe to OnStar®.See OnStar® System on page 4-38for more information about theservices OnStar provides.

Cleaning the MirrorDo not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with glass cleaner.

Outside Mirror(s)To maximize the viewing area,adjust each mirror to see the side ofyour vehicle and the area besideand behind your vehicle.

Manually fold the mirrors inward toprevent damage when goingthrough an automatic car wash.To fold, push the mirror toward thevehicle. Push the mirror outward,to return to its original position.


Outside Power Mirror(s)

hi (Power Mirrors): Press toselect the driver side or passengerside mirror. Press the arrows tomove the selected mirror in thedesired direction.

Outside Heated MirrorsThe vehicle may have outsideheated mirrors which help clear thecondensation, snow, and ice.

< (Rear Window Defogger):Press to heat the mirrors. See “RearWindow Defogger” under, ClimateControl System on page 7-1 formore information.

Sunroof

On vehicles with a sunroof, theswitches are located in the overheadconsole. To operate the sunroof,the ignition must be turned on.

t Vent/Open: With the sunroof inthe closed position, press to ventthe sunroof. With the sunroof in thevent position, press to open thesunroof. The sunshade will openautomatically with the sunroof.

u Close: Press to close thesunroof. Press and hold to closecompletely.

Sunshade

r Sunshade Open: Press toopen the sunshade.

s Sunshade Close: Press toclose the sunshade. Press and holdto close completely.


Storage

StorageGlove Box ..........................3-1Cupholders .........................3-1Sunglasses StorageCompartment ....................3-1

Cargo Cover .......................3-2Cargo Tie Downs ...............3-2

Storage

Glove BoxPull up on the handle to open theglovebox. There may be a shelfinside that can be removed by liftingup on the shelf and pulling it out.

Cupholders

There is a cupholder on the frontedge of the rear seat cushion.To open or close, press on thecupholder.

There is a cupholder on the rearcenter console.

Sunglasses StorageCompartment

The vehicle may have a sunglassesstorage compartment locatedabove the driver door. Pull the liddown to open the compartment.

Storage 3-1

Cargo CoverYour vehicle may have a cargocover.

To remove the cover, unhook theretaining straps from the liftgate andpull the cover from the side guides.

Cargo Tie DownsFour cargo tie-downs are locatedin the rear compartment of thevehicle. The tie-downs can be usedto secure small loads.

3-2 Storage

Instruments andControls

Instrument PanelOverviewInstrument PanelOverview ...........................4-2

Hazard Warning Flashers ...4-4Horn ...................................4-4Tilt Wheel ...........................4-4Turn Signal/MultifunctionLever ................................4-4

Cruise Control ....................4-5Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals .............................4-8

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..........4-8

Flash-to-Pass ......................4-8Windshield Wipers ..............4-8Windshield Washer .............4-9Rear Window Wiper/Washer .............................4-9

Accessory PowerOutlet(s) ..........................4-10

Warning Lights, Gages,and IndicatorsWarning Lights, Gages,and Indicators .................4-11

Instrument Panel Cluster ...4-12Speedometer andOdometer ........................4-13

Trip Odometer(s) ...............4-13Tachometer .......................4-13Safety Belt Reminders ......4-13Airbag Readiness Light .....4-14Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator ..........................4-15

Charging System Light ......4-16Brake System WarningLight ................................4-16

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light .......4-17

StabiliTrak® IndicatorLight ................................4-17

Engine CoolantTemperature WarningLight ................................4-18

Tire Pressure Light ...........4-18MalfunctionIndicator Lamp ................4-18

Oil Pressure Light .............4-21Low Oil Level Light ...........4-22

Winter Driving ModeLight ................................4-22

Fog Lamp Light ................4-22Exterior Lamps OffReminder ........................4-23

Cruise Control Light ..........4-23Highbeam On Light ...........4-23Door Ajar Light .................4-23Service Vehicle SoonLight ................................4-23

Fuel Gage ........................4-24Low Fuel Warning Light ....4-24

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)Driver InformationCenter (DIC) ...................4-25

DIC Operation andDisplays (Uplevel DICand Audio) .......................4-26

DIC Operation andDisplays (Base LevelDIC and Audio) ...............4-32

DIC Warnings andMessages (Base andUplevel Systems) ............4-36

OnStar® SystemOnStar® System ................4-38

Instruments and Controls 4-1

Instrument Panel Overview

4-2 Instruments and Controls

The main components of theinstrument panel are the:A. Exterior Lamps Controls on

page 5-1.B. Outlets. Outlet Adjustment on

page 7-4.C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

on page 4-4.D. DIC Operation and Displays

(Uplevel DIC and Audio) onpage 4-26 or DIC Operation andDisplays (Base Level DIC andAudio) on page 4-32 and AudioSteering Wheel Controls onpage 6-23. (If Equipped)

E. Instrument Panel Cluster onpage 4-12.

F. Audio Steering Wheel Controlson page 6-23. (If Equipped)

G. Windshield Wipers on page 4-8.H. Heated Seats on page 1-6.

(If Equipped)I. StabiliTrak® System on

page 8-19. (If Equipped)J. Driver Information Center (DIC)

on page 4-25. (If Equipped)K. Hazard Warning Flashers on

page 4-4.L. Power Door Locks on page 2-6.M. Passenger Safety Belt

Reminder. Safety BeltReminders on page 4-13.

N. Front Passenger Airbag.Airbag System on page 1-24.

O. Fog Lamps on page 5-2.(If Equipped)

P. Instrument Panel Brightnesson page 5-3.

Q. Hood Release on page 9-5.R. Tilt Wheel on page 4-4.S. Horn on page 4-4.T. Ignition Positions on page 8-2.U. Climate Control System on

page 7-1.V. Accessory Power Outlet(s) on

page 4-10. (Covered)W. Audio System(s) on page 6-1.X. Glove Box on page 3-1.


Hazard Warning Flashers

| : Press this button located onthe instrument panel, to makethe front and rear turn signal lampsflash on and off. This warnsothers that you are having trouble.Press the button again to turnthe flashers off.

While the hazard warning flashersare on, the turn signals do not work.

An indicator light on the hazardwarning flasher button comes onwhenever the ignition is turned on.

If the airbags are deployed, thehazard warning flashers turnon automatically. Press the buttontwice to turn them off.

HornPress the horn symbol in the middleof the steering wheel to soundthe horn.

Tilt WheelA tilt and telescope wheel lets thesteering wheel position be adjusted.

The adjustment lever is located onthe left side of the steering column.

It allows the steering column to bemoved up or down and in or out.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Turn Signal/MultifunctionLever

The lever on the left side of thesteering column includes thefollowing:

G : Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

2 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

J : Cruise Control (If Equipped)

Flash-to-Pass Feature.

Information for these features is onthe pages following.


Cruise Control

{ CAUTION

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. So, do not usethe cruise control on windingroads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

With cruise control, a speed ofabout 25 mph (40 km/h) or more canbe maintained without keepingyour foot on the accelerator. Cruisecontrol does not work at speedsbelow about 25 mph (40 km/h).

The cruise control buttonsare located on the turnsignal/multifunction lever on theleft side of the steering wheel.

9 (On/Off): Press and hold thebutton on the back end of the cruisecontrol lever, to turn the cruisecontrol system on or off. The CC onor CC off message will appear onthe instrument panel cluster atthe odometer display to show thatthe cruise control system is on or off.

AJ (Set/Accelerate): Press to seta speed and to accelerate the speed.

B W (Resume/Coast): Press toresume a set speed and to decreasethe speed.


Setting Cruise ControlFor safety reasons the cruise controlcannot be turned on until the brakehas been applied once.

With automatic transmission, onlyuse cruise control in D (Drive).

Press the On/Off button to turn onthe cruise control. A message brieflyappears on the instrument panelcluster at the odometer display whenthe cruise control has been turned on.

{ CAUTION

If you leave your cruise control onwhen you are not using cruise,you might hit a button and go intocruise when you do not want to.You could be startled and evenlose control. Keep the cruisecontrol switch off until you want touse cruise control.

1. Press J and the current speedis stored and maintained.

2. Take your foot off the acceleratorpedal. The J indicator light onthe instrument panel cluster turnson after the cruise control hasbeen set to the desired speed.

The cruise control automaticallydisengages under the followingconditions:

• The vehicle speed drops below25 mph (40 km/h).

• The brake is applied.

• The clutch pedal is applied(for manual transmissionvehicles).

• The automatic transmission isin N (Neutral).

• The On/Off button is pressed.CC On Message

CC Off Message


Resuming a Set SpeedOnce the vehicle speed reachesabout 25 mph (40 km/h) or more andthe cruise control is on, press W.The vehicle returns to the previousspeed selected before the cruisewas disengaged.

The stored speed is deleted if theignition is turned off.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control• Press and hold J until the

desired speed is reached,then release it.

• To increase vehicle speed insmall increments, brieflypress J repeatedly. Each timethis is done, the vehicle speedincrease by about 1 mph(1.6 km/h) without using theaccelerator pedal.

When the J button is releasedthe current speed is storedand maintained.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control• Press and hold W until the

desired lower speed is reached,then release it.

• To reduce vehicle speed in smallincrements, briefly press Wrepeatedly. Each time this isdone, the vehicle speeddecreases by about 1 mph(1.6 km/h).

When the W button is releasedthe current speed is storedand maintained.

Passing Another VehicleWhile Using Cruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed.When the accelerator pedal isreleased, the vehicle will return tothe previously set cruise speed.

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well the cruise control willwork on hills depends uponthe vehicle speed, load, and thesteepness of the hills. While goingup steep hills, you might haveto step on the accelerator pedal tomaintain the vehicle’s speed.While going downhill, you mighthave to brake or shift to a lower gearto keep the vehicle’s speed down.Of course, applying the braketurns off the cruise control.

Ending Cruise ControlThere are several ways to endcruise control:

• Step lightly on the brake orclutch pedal.

• The automatic transmission isplaced in N (Neutral).

• Press the 9 button.

Erasing Speed MemoryThe cruise control set speed memoryis erased when the cruise control orthe ignition is turned off.


Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

To signal a turn, move the lever allthe way up or down, past thedetent. The lever returns to itsstarting position when released.An arrow on the instrument panelcluster flashes in the direction of theturn or lane change.

To signal a lane change, raise orlower the lever until the arrow startsto flash, and then release thelever. Do not move the lever pastthe detent. The turn signal willautomatically flash three times andturn off.To cancel it before turning, movethe lever slightly in either direction.Do not past the detent.If the turn signal is moved up or downand left engaged, the headlamps andtaillamps will remain on and thebattery could be drained.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer23 (Headlamp High/LowBeam Changer): To change theheadlamps from low to highbeam, push the multifunction levertowards the instrument panel.To return to low-beam headlamps,push the lever towards theinstrument panel again or pull thelever toward you. Then release it.

This indicator light on the instrumentpanel cluster is on while the highbeam headlamps are on.

Flash-to-PassPull the turn signal/multifunctionlever towards you to flash the highbeams from low beam.

Windshield WipersClear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If thewiper blades are frozen to thewindshield, gently loosen or thawthem. If the blades do becomedamaged, install new blades or bladeinserts. See Windshield Wiper BladeReplacement on page 9-21.Heavy snow or ice can overload thewiper motor. A circuit breaker willstop the motor until it cools down.Clear away snow or ice to preventan overload.


The lever on the right side of thesteering column operates thewindshield wipers. Push up or pulldown on the leverto place it in one of the followingpositions.

[ (High): For rapid wiping cycles.

— (Low): For slow, steady wipingcycles.

-- (Intermittent/RainSense™):See RainSense™ wipers below.

9 (Off): Turns off the wipers.

For a single wipe pull the leverdown from the off position.The lever will return to its originalposition. For more cycles, holdthe lever down before releasing it.

RainSense™ WipersThere is a moisture sensor mountedon the windshield next to theinside rearview mirror. When active,the sensor is able to detectmoisture on the windshield andautomatically control the frequencyof the wipes according to theweather conditions.To turn on the RainSense feature,the wipers must be set to theintermittent delay setting on thewindshield wiper lever.

To turn off RainSense, move thelever downwards.

Notice: Going through anautomatic car wash with thewipers on can damage them.Turn the wipers off when goingthrough an automatic car wash.

Windshield Washer

{ CAUTION

In freezing weather, do not useyour washer until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

Pull the windshield wiper levertoward you to spray washer fluid onthe windshield. The wipers willrun for a few cycles to clear thewindshield. For more wash cycles,pull the lever forward and hold.

Rear WindowWiper/WasherFor vehicles with the rearwiper/washer feature, it is turnedon by moving the windshieldwiper lever.

To turn the rear wiper on or off,push the windshield wiper lever.


To turn on the rear washer, hold thewindshield wiper lever toward thefront of the vehicle to spray therear window.

The rear wiper turns onautomatically when the windshieldwiper is turned on and the shift leveris in R (Reverse).

The rear window washer uses thesame fluid bottle as the windshieldwasher. However, the rear windowwasher will run out of fluid beforethe windshield washer. If washerfluid sprays onto the windshield butnot the rear window, check thefluid level. See Windshield WasherFluid on page 9-20.

For information on replacing therear wiper blades, see WindshieldWiper Blade Replacement onpage 9-21.

Accessory PowerOutlet(s)The 12-volt accessory power outletscan be used to connect electricalequipment, such as a cellular phone.

There may be a accessory poweroutlet located inside the consolebelow the climate controls.

Notice: Leaving electricalequipment on for extendedperiods will drain the battery.Always turn off electricalequipment when not in use anddo not plug in equipment thatexceeds the maximum 20 ampererating.

Certain electrical accessoriesmay not be compatible with theaccessory power outlet and couldresult in blown vehicle or adapterfuses. If there is a problem,see your dealer/retailer foradditional information on theaccessory power outlet.

Notice: Adding any electricalequipment to your vehiclemay damage it or keep othercomponents from working asthey should. The repairs would notbe covered by your warranty.Check with your dealer/retailerbefore adding electricalequipment.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the installationinstructions included with theequipment.

Notice: Improper use of thepower outlet can cause damagenot covered by the warranty.Do not hang any type ofaccessory or accessory bracketfrom the plug because thepower outlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only.


Warning Lights,Gages, and IndicatorsWarning lights and gages cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gages couldprevent injury.

Warning lights come on when theremay be or is a problem with oneof the vehicle’s functions. Somewarning lights come on briefly whenthe engine is started to indicatethey are working.

Gages can indicate when there maybe or is a problem with one of thevehicle’s functions. Often gages andwarning lights work together toindicate a problem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gagesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Follow this manual’s advice.Waiting to do repairs can becostly and even dangerous.


Instrument Panel ClusterThe instrument cluster is designed to show at a glance how the vehicle is running. It shows how fast the vehicle isgoing, about how much fuel has been used, and many other things needed to drive safely and economically.

United States Base Automatic Transmission version shown, Canada, Manual Transmission andUplevel similar


Speedometer andOdometerThe speedometer shows thevehicle’s speed in both miles perhour (mph) or kilometers perhour (km/h).

The odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eithermiles or kilometers.

If a new odometer is installed, thenew one is set to the mileage totalof the old odometer. If it cannot,it will be set at zero and a labelmust be put on the driver’s door toshow the old mileage readingwhen the new odometer wasinstalled. If the mileage is unknown,the label should then indicate“previous mileage unknown.”

Trip Odometer(s)The trip odometer, located at thecenter of the instrument panelcluster, tells how far the vehicle hasbeen driven since the trip odometerwas set to zero.

To reset the trip odometer, hold thereset stem, located to the right ofthe speedometer, for approximatelyone second while the trip odometeris displayed. The engine must beturned on.

Service DisplayThe vehicle may have a displayabove the odometer that shows whenservice is needed. The number thatdisplays with “INSP” is the remainingdistance that can be driven untilservice is required. See Engine OilLife System on page 9-9 and theindex of the Saturn Astra LimitedWarranty, Maintenance and OwnerAssistance Information Manual.

Tachometer

The tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions per minute.

Safety Belt RemindersDriver Safety Belt ReminderLightThere is a Driver Safety BeltReminder Light on the instrumentpanel cluster.

When the engine is started this lightand chime come on and stay onfor several seconds to reminddrivers to fasten their safety belts.The light also begins to flash.

This cycle repeats if the driverremains unbuckled and the vehicleis moving.

If the driver safety belt is alreadybuckled, neither the light nor chimecome on.


Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

For vehicles with this light, itoperates the same as the SafetyBelt Reminder Light except that itis meant for the front passenger.

If the passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.

The front passenger safety beltwarning light and chime mayturn on if an object is put on theseat such as a briefcase, handbag,grocery bag, laptop or otherelectronic device. To turn off thewarning light and or chime, removethe object from the seat or bucklethe safety belt

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem. The systemcheck includes the airbag sensor,the pretensioners, the airbagmodules, the wiring and the crashsensing and diagnostic module.For more information on the airbagsystem, see Airbag System onpage 1-24.

This light will come on and stay onfor several seconds when thevehicle is started. Then the lightshould go out.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle has been startedor comes on when while driving,the airbag system may not workproperly. Have the vehicle servicedright away.

{ CAUTION

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.


Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has a passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System on page 1-30for important safety information.The rearview mirror has apassenger airbag status indicator.

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or the symbolfor on and off, for several seconds

as a system check. Then, afterseveral more seconds, the statusindicator will light either ON or OFF,or either the on or off symbol tolet you know the status of the rightfront passenger frontal andseat-mounted side impact airbags.

If the word ON or the on symbolis lit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the rightfront passenger frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag areenabled (may inflate).

If the word OFF or the off symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passengerfrontal airbag and seat-mountedside impact airbag. See PassengerSensing System on page 1-30for more on this, including importantsafety information.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or ifthere are no lights at all, theremay be a problem with the lights orthe passenger sensing system.See your dealer/retailer for service.

{ CAUTION

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrong withthe airbag system. To help avoidinjury to yourself or others, havethe vehicle serviced right away.See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 4-14 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

United States

Canada


Charging System Light

The charging system light comes onbriefly when the ignition is turnedon, but the engine is not running,as a check to show the light isworking. It should go out when theengine is started.

If the light stays on, or comes onwhile driving, there could be aproblem with the electrical chargingsystem. Have it checked by yourdealer/retailer. Driving while this lightis on could drain the battery.

If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, be sure to turn offall accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.

Brake System WarningLight

The brake indicator light shouldcome on briefly as the engineis started. If it does not come onhave the vehicle serviced byyour dealer/retailer.

When the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light comes onwhen the parking brake is set.The light stays on if the parkingbrake does not fully release.If it stays on after the parking brakeis fully released, there is a brakeproblem. Have the brake systeminspected immediately.

{ CAUTION

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.

If the light comes on while driving, achime sounds. Pull off the roadand stop. The pedal might be harderto push or go closer to the floor.It might also take longer to stop.If the light is still on, have the vehicletowed for service. See TowingYour Vehicle on page 9-73.

United States Canada


Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)light will come on briefly, as a check,when you start your vehicle.

If it does not, have your vehicleserviced so that the light worksproperly when it needs to.

If the light stays on longer than afew seconds after you start yourengine, or comes on and stays onwhile you are driving, try resettingthe system. To reset the system:1. If you are driving, pull over when

it is safe to do so. It may takelonger to stop the vehicle.

2. Place the vehicle in P (Park).3. Turn off the ignition.4. Then restart the engine.

If the light remains on after resettingthe system or comes on againwhile driving, your vehicle needsservice. The antilock brakes are notworking properly and there mightbe a problem stopping the vehicle.Pull off the road and stop. It maytake longer to stop the vehicle. If thelight is still on, have the vehicletowed for service. See Towing YourVehicle on page 9-73 for moreinformation.

{ CAUTION

Your brake system may not beworking properly if the AntilockBrake System (ABS) light is on.Driving with the ABS light on canlead to an accident. If the light isstill on after you have pulled offthe road and stopped carefully,have the vehicle towed forservice.

StabiliTrak® IndicatorLight

For vehicles with this light, it shouldcome on briefly when the ignition isturned on.If the light does not come on, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn ifthere is a problem.If the light stays on, or comes onwhile driving there may be aproblem with the StabiliTraksystem and your vehicle mayneed service. When this light is on,the StabiliTrak system does notassist in controlling the vehicle.Adjust your driving accordingly.See StabiliTrak® System onpage 8-19 for more information.When the system is active, the lightwill flash while the system helpscontrol the vehicle. You may alsofeel or hear the system working.This is normal.


Engine CoolantTemperature WarningLightThe engine coolant temperaturelight should come on briefly as theengine is started. If it does notcome on have the vehicle servicedby your dealer/retailer.

Notice: Driving with the enginecoolant temperature warning lighton could cause the vehicle tooverheat. See Engine Overheatingon page 9-18. The vehicle’s enginecould be damaged, and it mightnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Never drive with theengine coolant temperaturewarning light on.

If this light comes on and stays on,the engine has overheated. Pullover and see Engine Overheating onpage 9-18 for more information.

Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with this light, it comeson briefly as a check when theignition is turned on.

This light comes on and stays onwhen one or more of the vehicle’stires are significantly underinflated.

Stop and check the tires assoon as it is safe to do so.If underinflated, inflate to the properpressure. See Tires on page 9-40for more information.

This light flashes for approximatelyone minute and then stays onwhen the system detects amalfunction. See Tire PressureMonitor System on page 9-49 formore information.

MalfunctionIndicator LampCheck Engine LightA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors operation ofthe fuel, ignition, and emissioncontrol systems. It makes surethat emissions are at acceptablelevels for the life of the vehicle,helping to produce a cleanerenvironment.

This light should come on whenthe ignition is on, but the engineis not running, as check to showit is working. If it does not, havethe vehicle serviced by yourdealer/retailer.


If the check engine light comes onand stays on, while the engineis running, this indicates that thereis an OBD II problem and serviceis required.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problemis apparent. Heeding the light canprevent more serious damage to thevehicle. This system is alsodesigned to assist the servicetechnician in correctly diagnosingany malfunction.

Notice: If the vehicle iscontinually driven with this lighton, after a while, the emissioncontrols might not work as well,the vehicle’s fuel economymight not be as good, and theengine might not run assmoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Notice: Modifications madeto the engine, transmission,exhaust, intake, or fuel system ofthe vehicle or the replacementof the original tires with otherthan those of the same TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) canaffect the vehicle’s emissioncontrols and can cause this lightto come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead tocostly repairs not covered bythe vehicle warranty. This couldalso result in a failure topass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test.See Accessories andModifications on page 9-3.

This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

The following can prevent moreserious damage to the vehicle:

• Reduce vehicle speed.

• Avoid hard accelerations.

• Avoid steep uphill grades.

If the light continues to flash, whenit is safe to do so, stop thevehicle. Find a safe place to parkthe vehicle. Turn the key off, wait atleast 10 seconds, and restart theengine. If the light is still flashing,follow the previous steps andsee your dealer/retailer for serviceas soon as possible.


Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction has beendetected on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

An emission system malfunctionmight be corrected by doing thefollowing:

• Make sure the fuel cap is fullyinstalled. See Filling the Tankon page 8-36. The diagnosticsystem can determine if thefuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap allows fuelto evaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turnthe light off.

• If the vehicle has been driventhrough a deep puddle of water,the vehicle’s electrical systemmight be wet. The conditionis usually corrected whenthe electrical system dries out.A few driving trips should turnthe light off.

• Make sure to fuel the vehiclewith quality fuel. Poor fuelquality causes the engine not torun as efficiently as designedand may cause: stalling afterstart-up, stalling when the vehicleis changed into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.If one or more of these conditionsoccurs, change the fuel brandused. It will require at leastone full tank of the proper fuelto turn the light off.See Gasoline Octane onpage 8-34.

If none of the above have madethe light turn off, have yourdealer/retailer check the vehicle.

The dealer/retailer has the propertest equipment and diagnostictools to fix any mechanical orelectrical problems that might havedeveloped.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance ProgramsSome state/provincial and localgovernments have or might beginprograms to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on your vehicle.Failure to pass this inspectioncould prevent getting a vehicleregistration.

Here are some things to know tohelp the vehicle pass an inspection:

• The vehicle will not pass thisinspection if the check enginelight is on with the enginerunning, or if the key is in theON/RUN and the light is not on.


• The vehicle will not pass thisinspection if the OBD II(on-board diagnostic) systemdetermines that critical emissioncontrol systems have not beencompletely diagnosed by thesystem. The vehicle wouldbe considered not ready forinspection. This can happen ifthe battery has recently beenreplaced or if the battery has rundown. The diagnostic systemis designed to evaluate criticalemission control systemsduring normal driving. This cantake several days of routinedriving. If this has been done andthe vehicle still does not passthe inspection for lack ofOBD II (system readiness,your dealer/retailer can preparethe vehicle for inspection.

Oil Pressure Light

{ CAUTION

Do not keep driving if the oilpressure is low. The engine canbecome so hot that it catches fire.Someone could be burned.Check the oil as soon as possibleand have the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always follow the maintenanceschedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.

The oil pressure light should comeon briefly as the engine is started.If it does not come on have thevehicle serviced by yourdealer/retailer.

If the light comes on and stays on,it means that oil is not flowingthrough the engine properly.The vehicle could be low on oiland might have some other systemproblem.


Low Oil Level Light

This light should come on brieflywhen the ignition is turned on as acheck to let you know that thelight is working.

If this light comes on and stays onwhile the engine is running, itmeans your engine is low on oil.You need to check the oil level assoon as possible. See Engine Oil onpage 9-7 for further information.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always follow the maintenanceschedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.

Winter Driving ModeLight

This light will come on when thewinter driving mode feature is in use.

When you turn off the winterdriving mode feature, the light willgo out. If it stays on, your vehiclemay need service. See yourdealer/retailer. See “WinterDriving Mode” under AutomaticTransmission Operation on page 8-6for more information.

Fog Lamp Light

The fog lamp light comes on whenthe fog lamps are in use.

The light goes out when the foglamps are turned off. See FogLamps on page 5-2 for moreinformation.


Exterior Lamps OffReminder

This light comes on whenever theexterior lights are off.

See Exterior Lamps Controls onpage 5-1 for more information.

Cruise Control Light

This light comes on whenever youset the cruise control.

The light goes out when the cruisecontrol is turned off or disengaged.See Cruise Control on page 4-5for more information.

Highbeam On Light

This light comes on when thehigh-beam headlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 4-8 for moreinformation.

Door Ajar Light

This light comes on when a door orliftgate is open. Before driving,check that all doors are properlyclosed.

Service Vehicle SoonLight

This light should come one brieflywhen the ignition is turned onas a check to let you know that thelight is working.

This light will come on if a conditionexists that may require the vehicleto be taken in for service.

If the light comes on and stays on,see your dealer/retailer forservice as soon as possible.


Fuel Gage

Your fuel gage tells you about howmuch fuel you have left, whenthe ignition is on.

When the indicator nears empty,the low fuel warning light will comeon. You still have a little fuel left,but you should get more soon.See Low Fuel Warning Lighton page 4-24 for more information.

The arrow on the fuel gage pointsto the side of the vehicle withthe fuel door.

Here are five things that someowners ask about. These are normaland do not indicate a problemwith your fuel gage:

• At the service station, the gaspump shuts off before thegage reads full.

• It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the gage indicated.

• The indicator moves a little whenyou turn a corner or speed up.

• The gage goes back to emptywhen you turn off the ignition.

• The vehicle is driven or parkedon a grade.

Low Fuel Warning Light

This light, below the fuel gage,should come on briefly when theignition is turned on as a check to letyou know that the light is working.

This light also comes on whenthe fuel tank is low on fuel. Whenyou add fuel the light should go off.If it does not, have your vehicleserviced.


Driver InformationCenter (DIC)Vehicles with a Driver InformationCenter (DIC) can display:

• Time

• Outside temperature

• Date or audio system, if it isturned on

• Trip computer, on vehicles withthis feature

• Warning messages

The type of information and how itis displayed depends on theequipment of the vehicle and thesettings of the trip computerand audio system. See DICOperation and Displays (UplevelDIC and Audio) on page 4-26 orDIC Operation and Displays(Base Level DIC and Audio) onpage 4-32 and Audio System(s) onpage 6-1 for more information.

An F in the display indicates a fault.See your dealer/retailer for service.

Outside Air TemperatureThe DIC shows the temperatureoutside of the vehicle in eitherdegrees Fahrenheit or degreesCelsius. A fall in temperatureis displayed immediately, while arise in temperature is displayed aftera short delay.

On vehicles with the base level DIC,Q displays when the outside airtemperature is cold enough to createicy road conditions.

On vehicles with the uplevel DIC,“Slippery road” displays.

The road surface may already beicy even though the DIC showsa few degrees above freezing.Adjust your driving accordingly.


DIC Operation and Displays (Uplevel DIC and Audio)

If the vehicle has the uplevel DIC,the following information explainshow the system works.

Selecting FunctionsFunctions and settings of someequipment can be accessed throughthe DIC.

On some vehicles, menu optionscan be selected with themultifunction knob on the audiosystem:

1. Turn the multifunction knobuntil the desired menu itemis highlighted.

2. Press the multifunction knob toselect the menu item.

To exit a menu, turn themultifunction knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to “Return”or “Main”, then press the knob.

CDC 40


Menu options can be selected withthe left thumbwheel on thesteering wheel:

1. Turn the thumbwheel down toadvance to the next menu item.Turn the thumbwheel up to returnto the previous menu item.

2. Press the thumbwheel to selectthe menu item.

On some vehicles, if a warningmessage appears, the display isblocked from other functions.See DIC Warnings and Messages(Base and Uplevel Systems) onpage 4-36 for information onacknowledging the message.

For each functional area thereis a main page (Main), whichis selected at the top edge of thedisplay:

• Audio

• Trip computer, if your vehicle hasthis featureSee “Trip Computer” later in thissection for more information.

For Audio functions, see AudioSystem(s) on page 6-1 for moreinformation.

System SettingsTo enter the Settings menu, do oneof the following:

• Press MAIN, if your vehicle hasthis feature, on the audiosystem.

• Press the SETTINGS button onthe audio system.

The Settings menu will appear.

The functions are displayed in thefollowing order:

1. Time, Date

2. Language

3. Units

4. Contrast

5. Day / Night

6. Ign. (Ignition) logic


Setting Date and Time

To set the date and time:

1. Select Time, Date from theSettings menu.The menu for Time, Date isdisplayed.

2. Select the menu items required.

3. Make the desired selection.

Language Selection

To select the display language forsome functions:

1. Select Language from theSettings menu.The available languages aredisplayed.


When selected, a r appearsnext to the item.

Setting Units of Measure

To select which units of measureare to be used:

1. Select Units from theSettings menu.The available units are displayed.


When selected, a O appearsnext to the item.

Adjusting Contrast

The vehicle may have this feature.To adjust the contrast:

1. Select Contrast from theSettings menu.The menu for Contrast isdisplayed.


Day / Night

The vehicle may have this feature.The display can be adjusted tobest match the lighting conditions.To adjust this setting:

1. Select Day / Night from theSettings menu.The available options aredisplayed:

• Auto: Adjusts the displayautomatically based onthe lighting conditions.

• Day: Black or colored text ona light background.

• Night: White or colored texton a dark background.


When selected, a O appears nextto the item.

Ignition Logic

If the vehicle has this feature,see Audio System(s) on page 6-1for more information.


Trip ComputerThe vehicle may have a tripcomputer. The trip computerprovides information on driving data.This information is continuallyrecorded and evaluatedelectronically. If power has beeninterrupted or if the battery voltagehas dropped too low, the valuesstored in the trip computer willbe lost.

The trip computer main pageprovides information on range andinstantaneous consumption.

To access other trip computervehicle data, do one of the following:

• Press the BC button on theaudio system, if your vehicle hasthis feature.

• Press the left thumbwheel, if yourvehicle has this feature, on thesteering wheel.

• Select the trip computer menufront display.


Range

This display shows the approximatenumber of remaining miles (mi)or kilometers (km) the vehicle canbe driven without refueling.

The message “Range” displays ifless than 31 miles (50 km) canbe driven with the fuel remainingin the tank.

See DIC Warnings and Messages(Base and Uplevel Systems) onpage 4-36 for information onacknowledging the message.

The fuel range estimate is based onan average of the vehicle’s fueleconomy over recent driving historyand the amount of fuel remainingin the fuel tank. This estimatewill change if driving conditionschange. For example, if driving intraffic and making frequentstops, this display may read onenumber, but if the vehicle is driven

on a freeway, the number maychange even though the sameamount of fuel is in the fuel tank.This is because different drivingconditions produce differentfuel economies. Generally, freewaydriving produces better fueleconomy than city driving.Fuel range cannot be reset.

Instantaneous Consumption

This display shows the current fueleconomy at a particular moment andwill change frequently as drivingconditions change. This displayshows the instantaneous fueleconomy in miles per gallon (mpg) orliters per 100 kilometers (l/100 km).

The metric display changesdepending on speed:

• Below 8 mph (13 km/h),displays in l/h.

• Above 8 mph (13 km/h),displays in l/100 km.

This screen cannot be reset.


Distance Travelled

This display shows the currentdistance traveled in eithermiles (mi) or kilometers (km)since the last reset.

The measurement can be reset tozero at any time and restarted.See “Reset” later in this section.

Average Speed

This display shows the averagespeed of the vehicle in milesper hour (mph) or kilometers perhour (km/h). This average iscalculated based on the variousvehicle speeds recorded since thelast reset of this value.


Trip Consumption

This display shows the number ofgallons (gal) or liters (l) of fuelused since the last reset.


Average Consumption

This display shows the approximateaverage miles per gallon (mpg) orliters per 100 kilometers (l/100 km).This number is calculated based onthe number of mpg (l/100 km)recorded since the last time thismenu item was reset.


Timer

This display can be used as a timer.

Select Timer from the menu.The Timer menu will display.

To start the timer, select Start.

To reset the timer, select Reset.

The desired stop watch displays canbe selected from the Options menu,if your vehicle has this feature:

Driving Time excl. Stops: The timethe vehicle is in motion is recorded.Stationary time is not included.

Driving Time incl. Stops: The timethe vehicle is in motion is recordedalong with the time the vehicleis stationary with the key in theignition.

Travel Time: Measurement ofthe time from manual activation,by selecting Start, to manualdeactivation, by selecting Reset.


Reset

The following trip computerinformation can be reset:

• Distance travelled

• Average speed

• Trip consumption

• Average consumption

To reset the value:

1. Select BC 1 or BC 2 from the tripcomputer menu.The information of the two tripcomputers can be resetseparately, making it possible toevaluate data from differenttime periods.

2. To reset, do one of the following:

• Select the desired tripcomputer information.The value for the selectedfunction will be reset andrecalculated.

• To reset all information of atrip computer, select Allvalues.

After resetting, dashes will displayfor the trip computer informationselected. The recalculated valueswill display after a brief delay.


DIC Operation and Displays (Base Level DIC and Audio)

If the vehicle has the base levelDIC, the following informationexplains how the system works.

Selecting FunctionsFunctions and settings of someequipment can be accessedthrough the DIC. You can use thethumbwheel, if the vehicle hasone, or the buttons on the audiosystem as described following.

On some vehicles, menu optionscan be selected with the leftthumbwheel on the steering wheel:

1. Turn the thumbwheel down toadvance to the next menu item.Turn the thumbwheel up to returnto the previous menu item.

2. Press the thumbwheel to selectthe menu item.

The available menu options arethen shown in order on the display.

CD 30 with MP3 Player shown, without MP3 Player similar


On some vehicles, if a warningmessage appears, the display isblocked from other functions.See DIC Warnings and Messages(Base and Uplevel Systems) onpage 4-36 for information onacknowledging the message.

System SettingsTo enter the Settings menu:

1. Press SETTINGS on the audiosystem.Audio or System will appear.

2. Press the left arrow button onthe audio system or use thethumbwheel on the steeringwheel, if the vehicle has one,to reach menu item System.After pressing the OK button,the first function of the Systemmenu is shown.

The following functions areavailable:

• Time, setting hours

• Time, setting minutes

• Date, setting day

• Date, setting month

• Date, setting year

• Ignition Logic

• Language selection

• Setting units of measure

Setting Date and Time

To set the date and time:

1. Select time and date from theSettings menu.

2. Make the desired selections.The setting is saved whenthe menu item is exited.

Ignition Logic

If the vehicle has this feature,see Audio System(s) on page 6-1for more information.

Language Selection

To select the display language forsome functions:

1. Select language from theSettings menu.


Setting Units of Measure

To select which units of measureare to be used:

1. Select units from theSettings menu.



Trip ComputerThe vehicle may have a tripcomputer. The trip computerprovides information on driving data.This information is continuallyrecorded and evaluatedelectronically. If power has beeninterrupted or if the battery voltagehas dropped too low, the valuesstored in the trip computer willbe lost.

To access trip computer vehicledata, do one of the following:

• Press the BC button on the audiosystem.


Once an audio function has beenselected, the rows of the tripcomputer function are displayed.


Instantaneous Consumption

This display shows the current fueleconomy at a particular moment andwill change frequently as drivingconditions change. This displayshows the instantaneous fueleconomy in miles per gallon (mpg) orliters per 100 kilometers (l/100 km).

The metric display changesdepending on speed:

• Below 8 mph (13 km/h),displays in l/h.

• Above 8 mph (13 km/h),displays in l/100 km.

This screen cannot be reset.

Average Consumption

This display shows the approximateaverage miles per gallon (mpg) orliters per 100 kilometers (l/100 km).This number is calculated based onthe number of mpg (l/100 km)recorded since the last time thismenu item was reset.


Trip Consumption

This display shows the number ofgallons (gal) or liters (l) of fuelused since the last reset.


Average Speed

This display shows the averagespeed of the vehicle in milesper hour (mph) or kilometers perhour (km/h). This average iscalculated based on the variousvehicle speeds recorded since thelast reset of this value.



Distance Travelled

This display shows the currentdistance traveled in eithermiles (mi) or kilometers (km) sincethe last reset.


Range

This display shows the approximatenumber of remaining miles (mi)or kilometers (km) the vehicle canbe driven without refueling.

The message “Range” displays ifless than 31 mi (50 km) can bedriven with the fuel remaining inthe tank. The message “Refuel!”displays when approximately19 mi (30 km) can be driven withthe fuel remaining in the tank.

With less than 19 mi (30 km)worth of fuel remaining the rangedisplay will show “- -” once the“Refuel!” message has beenacknowledged.

See DIC Warnings and Messages(Base and Uplevel Systems) onpage 4-36 for information onacknowledging the message.

The fuel range estimate is based onan average of the vehicle’s fueleconomy over recent driving historyand the amount of fuel remainingin the fuel tank. This estimatewill change if driving conditionschange. For example, if drivingin traffic and making frequent stops,this display may read one number,but if the vehicle is driven on afreeway, the number may changeeven though the same amountof fuel is in the fuel tank.

This is because different drivingconditions produce different fueleconomies. Generally, freewaydriving produces better fueleconomy than city driving.Fuel range cannot be reset.

Stop Watch

This display can be used as a timer.

To start or stop the timer, pressthe right arrow on the audio system.

To reset the timer, press the leftarrow until the value returns to zero.

If your vehicle has the leftthumbwheel on the steering wheel,you can start or stop the timerby pressing the thumbwheel.


Reset

The following trip computerinformation can be reset:

• Average consumption

• Trip consumption

• Average speed

• Distance travelled

To reset the value:

1. Select the desired trip computerinformation.

2. Press the OK button on theaudio system, or press theleft thumbwheel, if your vehiclehas this feature, on the steeringwheel:

• To reset the current value,press and hold briefly.

• To reset all values, press forsix seconds.

DIC Warnings andMessages (Base andUplevel Systems)Messages are displayed on the DICto notify the driver that the statusof the vehicle has changed and thatsome action may be needed bythe driver to correct the condition.Multiple messages may appear oneafter another.

The DIC monitors some fluid levels,battery of the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter, thetheft-deterrent system on vehicleswith this feature, the brake lightswitch, and important exterior lights,including wiring and fuses.

Some messages may not requireimmediate action, but you canacknowledge that you received themessages and to clear themfrom the display by doing one of thefollowing:

• Press the OK button on the baselevel audio system.

• Press the multifunction knob, ifyour vehicle has this feature,on the uplevel audio system.


If there are several warningmessages, acknowledge themone at a time.


Some messages cannot be clearedfrom the DIC display becausethey are more urgent. Thesemessages require action before theycan be cleared. You should takeany messages that appear onthe display seriously and rememberthat clearing the messages willonly make the messages disappear,not correct the problem.

Warning messages for theuplevel DIC follow. On the baselevel DIC, messages appear in anabbreviated form.

Brakelight check - - -This message displays when thereis a problem with the vehiclelighting. The source of the problemis displayed as text. For example,“Brakelight check right”.

Brakelight switch checkThis message displays when thebrake lamp does not come on whenthe brake is applied. Have yourvehicle serviced by yourdealer/retailer immediately.

Coolant level checkThis message displays when theengine coolant level is low. Have thecooling system serviced by yourdealer/retailer as soon as possible.See Engine Coolant on page 9-16.

Remote Control Battery checkThis message displays if theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter battery is low. Replacethe battery in the transmitter.See “Battery Replacement” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2-4.

Safeguard checkThis message displays when thereis a problem with the theft-deterrentsystem. Have the system servicedby your dealer/retailer immediately.

Washer Fluid Level(Base Level) or WashingWater Level (Uplevel)This message displays when thevehicle’s windshield washer fluid islow. When the washer fluid levelis low, the rear window washersystem is deactivated. Fill thewindshield washer fluid reservoirto the proper level as soon aspossible. See Windshield WasherFluid on page 9-20.


OnStar® System

OnStar uses several innovativetechnologies and live advisors toprovide a wide range of safety,security, information, andconvenience services. If the airbagsdeploy, the system is designed tomake an automatic call to OnStarEmergency advisors who canrequest emergency services be sentto your location. If the keys arelocked in the vehicle, call OnStarat 1-888-4-ONSTAR to have asignal sent to unlock the doors.OnStar Hands-Free Calling,including 30 trial minutes good for60 days, is available on mostvehicles. OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigation service, with one trialroute, is available on most vehicles.

Press the OnStar button to have anOnStar advisor contact RoadsideService.

OnStar service is provided subjectto the OnStar Terms and Conditionsincluded in the OnStar Subscriberglove box literature.

Some services such as RemoteDoor Unlock or Stolen VehicleLocation Assistance may not beavailable until the owner of thevehicle registers with OnStar.After the first prepaid year, contactOnStar to select a monthly orannual subscription payment plan.If a payment plan is not selected,the OnStar system and all services,including airbag notification andemergency services, may bedeactivated and no longer available.For more information visitonstar.com (U.S.) or onstar.ca(Canada), or press the OnStarbutton to speak with an advisor.

Not all OnStar services are availableon all vehicles. To check if thisvehicle is able to provide theservices described below, or for afull description of OnStar servicesand system limitations, see theOnStar Owner’s Guide in theglove box or visit onstar.com (U.S.)or onstar.ca (Canada), contactOnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) or TTY1-877-248-2080, or press theOnStar button to speak with anOnStar advisor 24 hours a day,7 days a week.

OnStar Services Available withthe Safe & Sound Plan• Automatic Notification of Airbag

Deployment

• Link to Emergency Services

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle LocationAssistance


• Remote Door Unlock/VehicleAlert

• OnStar Vehicle Diagnostic Email

• GM Goodwrench On DemandDiagnostics (if equipped)

• OnStar Hands-Free Calling with30 trial minutes

• OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)

OnStar Services Included withDirections & Connections Plan• All Safe and Sound Plan Services

• OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation(If equipped) or DrivingDirections - Advisor delivered

• RideAssist

• Information and ConvenienceServices

OnStar Hands-Free CallingOnStar Hands-Free Calling allowseligible OnStar subscribers tomake and receive calls using voicecommands. Hands-Free Callingis fully integrated into the vehicle,and can be used with OnStarPre-Paid Minute Packages. Mostvehicles include 30 trial minutesgood for 60 days. Hands-FreeCalling can also be linked to aVerizon Wireless service plan in theU.S. or a Bell Mobility serviceplan in Canada, depending oneligibility. To find out more, refer tothe OnStar Owner’s Guide inthe vehicle’s glove box, visitonstar.com or onstar.ca, or speakwith an OnStar advisor by pressingthe OnStar button or calling1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).

OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigationVehicles with the OnStarTurn-by-Turn Navigation systemcan provide voice-guided drivingdirections. Press the OnStar buttonto have an OnStar advisor locatea business or address and downloaddriving directions to the vehicle.Voice-guided directions to thedesired destination will playthrough the audio system speakers.See the OnStar Owner’s Guidefor more information.

OnStar Virtual AdvisorOnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature ofOnStar Hands-Free Calling that usesminutes to access location-basedweather, local traffic reports, andstock quotes. Press the phone buttonand give a few simple voicecommands to browse through thevarious topics. See the OnStarOwner’s Guide for more information.This feature is only available in thecontinental U.S.


How OnStar Service WorksThe OnStar system can recordand transmit vehicle information.This information is automatically sentto an OnStar Call Center when theOnStar button is pressed, theemergency button is pressed, or ifthe airbags deploy. This informationusually includes the vehicle’s GPSlocation and, in the event of a crash,additional information regarding thecrash that the vehicle was involvedin (e.g. the direction from whichthe vehicle was hit). When theVirtual Advisor feature of OnStarHands-Free Calling is used, thevehicle also sends OnStar thevehicle’s GPS location so they canprovide services where it is located.

OnStar service cannot work unlessthe vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area. OnStar service alsocannot work unless the vehicle is ina place where the wireless service

provider OnStar has hired for thatarea has coverage, network capacityand reception when the service isneeded, and technology that iscompatible with the OnStar service.Not all services are availableeverywhere, particularly in remote orenclosed areas, or at all times.

Location information about thevehicle is only available if the GPSsatellite signals are unobstructedand available.

The vehicle must have a workingelectrical system, including adequatebattery power, for the OnStarequipment to operate. There areother problems OnStar cannotcontrol that may prevent OnStarfrom providing OnStar service atany particular time or place.Some examples are damage toimportant parts of the vehicle in acrash, hills, tall buildings, tunnels,weather or wireless phone networkcongestion.

Your Responsibility

Increase the volume of the radio ifthe OnStar advisor cannot be heard.If the light next to the OnStarbuttons is red, the system may notbe functioning properly. Pressthe OnStar button and request avehicle diagnostic. If the lightappears clear (no light is appearing),your OnStar subscription hasexpired and all services have beendeactivated. Press the OnStarbutton to confirm that the OnStarequipment is active.


Lighting

LightingExterior Lamps Controls .....5-1Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) ....................5-2

Delayed Headlamps ............5-2Fog Lamps .........................5-2Instrument PanelBrightness .........................5-3

Dome Lamp(s) ....................5-3Entry Lighting .....................5-3Reading Lamps ..................5-3Trunk Lamp ........................5-4Battery Run-DownProtection .........................5-4

Lighting

Exterior Lamps ControlsThe exterior lamp control islocated on the instrument panel tothe left of the steering wheel.

Turn the exterior lamp control to thefollowing positions:

T (Off): Turns off the exterior lamps.

AUTO (Automatic): Turns theexterior lamps on and offautomatically, depending uponoutside lighting.

; (Parking Lamps): Turns on theparking lamps together with thefollowing:

• Taillamps

• Sidemarkers

• License Plate Lamps

2 (Headlamps): Turns on theheadlamps, together with thepreviously listed lamps.

After 15 minutes with the ignitionswitched off and the low-beamheadlamps on, the parking lampsturn on.

Lighting 5-1

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) canmake it easier for others to seethe front of your vehicle during theday. DRL can be helpful in manydifferent driving conditions, but theycan be especially helpful in theshort periods after dawn and beforesunset. Fully functional daytimerunning lamps are required on allvehicles first sold in Canada.

The DRL system makes thelow-beam headlamps turn on at areduced brightness when thefollowing conditions are met:

• The engine is running.

• The light sensor determines it isnight and the exterior lampscontrol is in the off position.

• The light sensor determines it isdaytime.

The taillamps and other lamps willbe off.

The DRL turns off when the engineis not running.

The regular headlamps or parkinglamps should be used when needed.

Delayed HeadlampsVehicles with headlamp exit delay,keep the headlamps and taillampson for 30 seconds.

To activate:

1. Turn the ignition off and removethe key from the ignition.

2. Open the driver door.

3. Pull the multifunction levertoward the steering wheel.

To deactivate, do either of thefollowing:

• Insert the key into the ignition.

• Pull the multifunction lever towardthe steering wheel again whilethe driver door is open.

Fog LampsFor vehicles with fog lamps, thebutton is located on the instrumentpanel, to the left of the steeringwheel.

The ignition and headlamps orparking lamps must be on to usethe fog lamps. The fog lamps will notturn on if the high beam headlampsor flash to pass are active.

# : Press to turn the fog lamps onor off. An indicator light on theinstrument panel cluster comes onwhen the fog lamps are on.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to beon along with the fog lamps.

5-2 Lighting

Instrument PanelBrightness

D (Instrument PanelBrightness): The knob with thissymbol on it is located next tothe exterior lamps control to the leftof the steering wheel. Push theknob in all the way until it extendsout and then turn the knob clockwiseor counterclockwise to brighten ordim the lights. Push the knobback in when finished.

Dome Lamp(s)There are two dome lamps. The reardome lamp turns on automaticallywith the front dome lamp.

+ (On/Off): Press to turn the frontdome lamp on or off while thedoors are closed.

Entry LightingWith entry lighting, the interior of thevehicle is illuminated while enteringthe vehicle. The interior lampsturn on briefly when the dooris unlocked using the key or theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter and the ignition is inLOCK/OFF. After a few secondshave passed, the interior lamps willslowly fade out.

Reading LampsFront Reading Lamps

The front reading lamps, located onthe headliner, can be controlledseparately by the buttons locatednear each lamp.

\ (On/Off): Press to turn the lampon or off.

Lighting 5-3

Rear Reading LampsThe rear seat reading lamps can beturned on while the ignition is on.

9 (Off): Press to turn the lamp off.

R (On): Press to turn the lamp on.

Trunk LampThe trunk lamp comes on when thetrunk is opened and turns offwhen the trunk is closed.

Battery Run-DownProtectionThis feature helps prevent thebattery from being drained, if thecourtesy lamps, reading lamps, sunvisor, glovebox or rear compartmentlamp are left on. If any of theselamps are left on, they automaticallyturn off after approximately20 minutes, if the ignition is off.

5-4 Lighting

Infotainment

Audio System(s)Audio System(s) .................6-1Radio(s) .............................6-2Theft-Deterrent Feature .....6-23Audio Steering WheelControls ..........................6-23

Radio Reception ...............6-24Fixed Mast Antenna ..........6-24

Audio System(s)Determine which radio the vehiclehas and read the following pages tobecome familiar with its features.

{ CAUTION

Taking your eyes off the road forextended periods could cause acrash resulting in injury or deathto you or others. Do not giveextended attention toentertainment tasks while driving.

This system provides access tomany audio and non audio listings.

To minimize taking your eyes offthe road while driving, do thefollowing while the vehicle is parked:

• Become familiar with theoperation and controls ofthe audio system.

• Set up the tone, speakeradjustments, and preset radiostations.

For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 8-16.

Notice: Contact yourdealer/retailer before adding anyequipment.

Adding audio or communicationequipment could interferewith the operation of the vehicle’sengine, radio, or other systems,and could damage them.Follow federal rules coveringmobile radio and telephoneequipment.

Infotainment 6-1

Radio(s)

System Operation

n / R (Volume/Power): Pressto turn the system on or off.Turn to increase or decrease thevolume.

BC (Board Computer): Press touse the Board Computer. SeeDIC Operation and Displays(Uplevel DIC and Audio) onpage 4-26 or DIC Operation andDisplays (Base Level DIC andAudio) on page 4-32.

OK: Press to confirm selectionsand go to the next page in thesettings menu.

\ or ]: Press to change menuoptions.

SOUND: Press to enter the soundsettings menu and go to thenext page in sound settings.

SETTINGS: Press to adjust systemand sound settings.

Ignition Logic

When this feature is enabled it turnsthe audio system on or off whenthe ignition is turned on or off.

To turn the audio system on or offwith Ignition Logic:

• Press n / R or insert a CD toturn the audio system on. Pressn / R to turn the audiosystem off when the IgnitionLogic system is disabled and theignition is ON/RUN.

CD 30 MP3 Shown, CD 30 Similar

6-2 Infotainment

• For vehicles with OnStar®, theaudio system will only turn offif the ignition is OFF and OnStaris not in use when the IgnitionLogic system is enabled.

The Ignition Logic is preset to turnoff the audio system when theignition is turned off. To enable ordisable Ignition Logic:

1. Press SETTINGS until Audiodisplays.

2. Press \ until System displays.

3. Press OK until Ign. LogicON or Ign. Logic OFF displays.

4. Press \ or ] to select thesetting. The setting is savedautomatically.

• Press SETTINGS again tomove back one level inthe menu.

• Press FM/AM, CD/MP3, orBC to turn on that feature.

Audio displays and the systemstarts to play if SETTINGS, FM/AM,CD/MP3, or BC is not pressedwithin five seconds after the settingis saved.

System Display

The following information shows onthe system display:

• FM or AM, and the currentstation frequency if the radio isactive.

• The station name displays if RDSis activated.

• AS displays if the AS level isactivated.

• CD displays, and the CD titlenumber or the CD title nameif the CD player is active.

• MP3 displays if the CD is anMP3 CD.

• RDM displays if the CD is beingplayed in random mode.

The most recent selected audiosource plays when the audio systemis turned on and the display is lit.

The outside temperature, time, anddate display when the audiosystem is turned off and the ignitionis ON/RUN, see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 4-25.

Audio SettingsThe audio settings can be set foreach audio source and arestored separately for each radiostation and the CD player.

Adjusting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

To adjust the Bass:

1. Press SOUND until Bassappears.

2. Press \ or ] to adjust the levelfrom -12 through +12. Thesetting is saved automatically.

• Press SETTINGS again to goback one level in the menu.

• Press FM/AM, CD/MP3, or BC todisplay that function.

Infotainment 6-3

Audio displays and the audiosystem starts to play if SETTINGS,FM/AM, CD/MP3, or BC is notpressed within five seconds afterthe setting is saved.

To adjust the Treble:

1. Press SOUND until Trebleappears.




Adjusting the Sound Settings

There are preset sound settingsdesigned for different types of music

To adjust the sound settingsusing the SOUND button:

1. Press SOUND until Soundappears.

2. Press \ or ] to select betweenRock, Disco, Classic, Jazz,Vocal, and Off. The setting issaved automatically.



To adjust the sound settings usingthe SETTINGS button:

1. Press SETTINGS until Audioappears.

2. Press OK until Sound appears.

3. Press \ or ] to select betweenRock, Disco, Classic, Jazz,Vocal, and Off. The setting issaved automatically.



Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade)

To adjust the Balance using theSOUND button:

1. Press SOUND until Balanceappears.




6-4 Infotainment

To adjust the Balance using theSETTINGS button:


2. Press OK until Balance appears.

3. Press \ or ] to adjust thelevel from -12 through +12.The setting is savedautomatically.



To adjust the Fade using theSOUND button:

1. Press SOUND until Faderappears.




To adjust the Fade using theSETTINGS button:


2. Press OK until Fader appears.




Speed-Dependant VolumeControl (SDVC)

SDVC automatically adjusts thevolume to compensate for road andwind noise as the vehicle increasesor decreases speed while driving.

To adjust SDVC:


2. Press OK until SDVC appears.

3. Press \ or ] to adjust the levelfrom 0 through 5. The setting issaved automatically.



OnStar® Volume

For vehicles with OnStar, the OnStarVolume is used to set the maximuminitial volume level for the OnStarsystem when it is turned on.

To set OnStar Volume:


2. Press OK until OnStar Vol.appears.

3. Press \ or ] to adjust the levelfrom -12 through 12. The settingis saved automatically.



Infotainment 6-5

On Volume

The On Volume is used to set themaximum initial volume level for theaudio system when it is turned on.

The maximum initial volume level isused only if the volume levelbefore turning the audio system offwas higher than the maximuminitial volume level set. This will workwhen the audio system has beenoff for at least five minutes and theignition is OFF.

To set the On Volume level:


2. Press OK until On Volumeappears.

3. Press \ or ] to adjust the levelfrom -12 through 12. The settingis saved automatically.



Using the Radio

FM/AM: Press to select betweenFM, FM-AS, AM, and AM-AS,or to listen to the radio while a CDis playing.

RDS (Radio Data System): Pressto identify stations by nameinstead of the radio frequency.

LOC (LOCAL/DX Function): Pressto change between LOC ON or LOCOFF. When the LOC function is on, itsearches for the strongest radiofrequency. If none is found, itautomatically search for a weakerradio frequency. If no frequency isfound after the second search, theradio returns to the last activefrequency. If a new station search isnot started within one minute, the lowsensitivity (LOCAL) is set when thenext search is started. When LOCOFF is set, a search is carried outusing the high sensitivity (DX).

Finding an FM/AM Station

1 - 9 (Station Preset Buttons):Press to play stations that areprogrammed to the radio presetpushbuttons.

SCN (Station Preset Scan): Pressto start station preset scan. Theradio goes to the first preset station,plays for a few seconds, thengoes to the next preset station.Press SCN again to stop scanningpreset stations.

\ or ]: Press to find radio stationsusing the automatic station searchor the manual station search.

Automatic Station Search: Useautomatic station search whenthe radio frequency is unknown.

Press \ or ] for more thenone second to have the radio searchfor the next station. Seek is shownon the display and the radio ismuted until a station is found.

6-6 Infotainment

If the radio fails to locate a station,the last active frequency is thenreset. When LOC is activated,a search for the next strong stationis made. If it is not activated, itsearches the next receivable station.

Manual Station Search: Usemanual station search whenthe radio frequency is known.

To use manual station search:

• Press and hold \ or ] until thedesired frequency is reached.

• Tap \ or ] until the desiredfrequency is reached.

Setting Preset Stations

The radio can store up to36 stations using the stationpreset buttons:

• 9 FM

• 9 FM - AS (Autostore)

• 9 AM

• 9 AM - AS (Autostore)

Radio stations can be storedmanually, and by using Autostore.

To manually store preset stations:

1. Select FM or AM and tune to thedesired radio station.

2. Press and hold one of the ninestation preset buttons, the radiobriefly mutes and displaysthe previously stored station. Thenew station has been storedwhen the radio begins playingagain.

3. Repeat the steps for each radiostation to be stored.

AS (Autostore): Press toautomatically store the ninestrongest stations in the selectedradio band.

To use Autostore:

1. Select FM or AM.

2. Press and hold AS until a beepis heard.

3. The radio begins storing thestations in the nine presetbutton locations.

Using the CD PlayerDisplay Options

The display can be changeddepending on what type of CD is inthe CD player. The displayoptions are:

Audio CD without CD text:

• Track number and playing time.

Audio CD with CD text:

• Track title

• Artist name

• Tack number and playing time

• CD name

To change the display:

1. Press CD/MP3 twice, CD infoappears on the display.

2. Press \ or ] to select thedisplay type.

3. After about five seconds, theselected display type is saved.

Infotainment 6-7

Loading a CD

To load a CD, insert the CD labelside up in the CD player. TheCD player pulls the CD inautomatically.

• The display shows Read CD, theCD symbol and the number ofCD tracks.

• When the first track starts toplay, the display shows track1 and the playing time.

Playing a CD

CD/MP3: Press to play a CD orMP3 CD that is already loaded intothe CD player while the radio isplaying. See “Using an MP3” in theowner manual index.

\ or ]: Press to go to the next orprevious track. Press and hold tofast forward or fast rewind within atrack and the CD plays at ahigher speed and a reduced volume.

Z : Press to eject a CD, Eject CDis displayed and the radio beginsplaying.

Random: Press CD/MP3 threetimes to hear the tracks in random,rather than sequential order.Press \ or ] to select betweenRandom on and Random off. RDMshows on the display whenrandom is in use.

Using an MP3 CDThe CD 30 MP3 is capable ofplaying MP3 CDs that have beenrecorded to a CD-R.

Supported File Structure

The CD 30 MP3 supports up to:

• 99 albums.

• 367 tracks.

• Bit rates up to 256 kbps.

File Naming

Files must be named .mp3 for theCD to work. ID3 tags are supported.The following information shows onthe display when the CD MP3 isplaying.

MP3 CDs recorded without ID3 tagsdisplay:

• File name

• Track number and playing time

• Album name

MP3 CDs recorded with ID3 tagsdisplay:

• Track title

• Artist name

• Track number and playing time

• Album name

6-8 Infotainment


1. Press CD/MP3 twice, CD infoappears on the display.

2. Press \ or ] to select thedisplay type.

3. After about five seconds, theselected display type is saved.

Playing an MP3

CD/MP3: Press to play an MP3 CDthat is already loaded into the CDplayer while the radio is playing.

Selecting a Track

\ or ]: Press to go to the next orprevious track. Press and hold tofast forward or fast rewind within atrack. During fast forward, theCD plays at a higher speed and areduced volume.

Z : Press to eject a CD, Eject CDappears on the display and theradio begins playing.

Selecting an Album

To select a different album whenthe MP3 CD contains severalalbums:

1. Press CD/MP3.

2. Press \ or ] until the desiredalbum displays.

Random Mode

MP3 CD can be played in thefollowing random modes:

• Random album: Tracks from theselected album are playedrandomly.

• Random CD: All tracks from allalbums are played randomly.

• Random Off: Turns offrandom play.

To use random:

1. Press CD/MP3 three times.

2. Press \ or ] to select betweenRandom album, Random CDand Random Off.

RDM shows on the display whenrandom is use.

Care of CD’s and the CDPlayerCare of CDs

Store CDs in their original cases orother protective cases and awayfrom direct sunlight and dust.The CD player scans the bottom ofthe disc. If the bottom of a CD isdamaged it may not play properly orat all. Do not touch the bottom ofa CD while handling it. Pick up CDsby grasping the outer edges orthe edge of the hole and theouter edge.

If the surface of a CD is dirty, take asoft, lint free cloth or dampen aclean, soft cloth in a mild, neutraldetergent solution mixed with water,and clean it. Make sure the wipingprocess starts from the center tothe edge.

Infotainment 6-9

Care of the CD Player

Do not add labels to a CD, it couldget caught in the CD player.Use a marking pen to write on thetop of the CD if a description isneeded.

Do not use CD lens cleaners, theycould damage the CD player.

Notice: If a label is added to aCD, or more than one CD isinserted into the slot at a time, oran attempt is made to playscratched or damaged CDs, theCD player could be damaged.While using the CD player,use only CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load oneCD at a time, and keep the CDplayer and the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, anddebris.

System Operation

R (Volume/Power): Press to turnthe system on or off. Turn toincrease or decrease the volume.

BC (Board Computer): Pressto use the Board Computer, see DICWarnings and Messages (Baseand Uplevel Systems) on page 4-36.

[ (Multifunction Knob): Turn toselect a menu item, press toenable or disable a menu item.

\ / ] / _ / ^ (Four-way Switch):Press to select menu options.

SOUND: Press to enter the soundsettings menu and go to thenext page in sound settings.

SETTINGS: Press to adjust systemand sound settings.

CDC 40

6-10 Infotainment

Ignition Logic

When this feature is enabled it turnsthe audio system on or off when theignition is turned on or off.

To turn the audio system on or offwith the Ignition Logic:

• Press R or Z to turn the audiosystem on. Press R to turn theaudio system off when the IgnitionLogic system is disabled and theignition is ON/RUN.

• For vehicles with OnStar®, theaudio system will only turn off ifthe ignition is OFF and OnStar isnot in use when the Ignition Logicsystem is enabled.

The Ignition Logic is preset to turn offthe audio system when the ignition isturned off. To enable or disableIgnition Logic:

1. Press SETTINGS, SystemSettings displays.

2. Turn the multifunction knob toselect Ign. Logic and press themultifunction knob to select orun-select the option.

System Display

The following information shows onthe system display:

• FM or AM displays, and thecurrent station frequency orstation name if the radio is active.

• The station name displayswhen RDS stations are active.

• The station name displays if RDSis activated.

• AS displays if AS is activated.

• CD displays along with theCD number, CD track number,CD title, artists name or

album name plus track time andtrack name, if the CD playeris active.

• CD in displays if more than oneCD is inserted.

• MP3 displays if the CD is anMP3 CD.

• RDM displays if the CD is beingplayed back in random mode.

• T displays if Random CD is on.

• U displays if RandomMagazine is on.

• S displays if repeat track is on.

• u displays if Scan CD is on.

The most recent selected audiosource plays when the audio systemis turned on and the display is lit.The outside temperature, time, anddate display when the audiosystem is turned off and the ignitionis ON/RUN, see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 4-25.

Infotainment 6-11

Menu SystemThe audio systems menu containstypes of menu pages:

Selection pages

Selection pages have a selectionmenu on the left side of the screenshowing a preview of the menuitems. Selection pages leadto navigation or settings pages.

Feature pages

Feature pages are menu pages.Feature pages also containmenu items which can be selectedand lead to other navigation orsettings pages. The Tuner menu isan example of a feature page.

Settings pages

Setting pages are menu pageswhere the audio system settings canbe changed.

Menus

The menus of the audio systemsare structured in levels. The currentmenu level is indicated by verticallines at the edge of the screen.

Selecting from a Menu

The items within a menu areselected by turning the multifunctionknob to move the cursor. Thecursor highlights the menu itembeing selected.

To select a menu item:

1. Turn the multifunction knob untilthe desired menu item ishighlighted.

2. Press the multifunction knob toselect the function or to displayanother menu.

• Selected menu items display asV or a.

• Un-selected menu items displayas ( or o.

To exit from a menu:

• Turn the multifunction knob tothe left until Return is displayedand then press the knob.

• Press CDC, FM/AM, SETTINGS,SOUND, or MAIN at any time toexit from a menu and usethat function.

Selecting the Audio Menu

The Audio menu allows access toFM, AM, CD, and Sound menus. Toaccess the Audio menu from oneof these menus:

Turn the multifunction knob to theleft until Return displays andthen press the knob.

6-12 Infotainment

Selecting from a List

Some menus are displayed in theform of lists.

• If the cursor is moved to the topor bottom area of the display,other list items appear. Ascroll-bar on the right edge of thedisplay indicates the currentcursor position in the list.

• The last list item selected ismarked with an arrow insome lists.

• The name of the list and thenumber of items in it aredisplayed above the list.

To select from a list:

1. Turn the multifunction knob untilthe desired item is highlighted.

2. Press the multifunction knob toselect the item.

Overlay Menus

Additional notes and information onthe audio system or other vehiclecomponents may appear onthe display as an overlay in somecases. The current menu is overlaidwith the information box. Somesettings have to be confirmed,others are automatically enabledafter a short time.

Audio SettingsThe audio settings can be set foreach audio source and arestored separately for each radiostation and the CD player.

Adjusting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

To adjust the Bass:

1. Press SOUND and select theSound menu item.

2. Select Treble - Bass.

3. Select Bass from the menu andturn the multifunction knob toadjust the level.

4. Press the multifunction knob tosave the setting.

Bass tones are automaticallyadjusted to the driving speed tocompensate for rolling and ambientnoise. The setting cannot bechanged.

To adjust the Treble:


2. Select Treble - Bass.

3. Select Treble from the menu andturn the multifunction knob toadjust the level.


Infotainment 6-13

Adjusting the Equalizer

The equalizer allows changes to bemade to seven frequencies.

To adjust the equalizer:


2. Select Equalizer.

3. Select the desired frequency andturn the multifunction knob toadjust the level.


5. Repeat these steps for eachfrequency.

After making changes to theequalizer, the user option in theSound menu is enabled.

Adjusting the Sound Settings

There are preset sound settingsdesigned for different types ofmusic.

To adjust the sound settings:


2. Select Sound.

3. Select: User, Jazz, Speech, Pop,Classical, and Rock.


Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade)

To adjust the Balance:


2. Select Fader - Balance.

3. Select Balance from the menuand turn the multifunction knobto adjust the level.


To adjust the Fade:


2. Select Fader - Balance.

3. Select Fader from the menu andturn the multifunction knob toadjust the level.


Adjusting the Sound Position

The sound position for the audiosystem can be adjusted. Thesettings are:

Driver: Adjusts the sound positionfor the drivers seat.

Front: Adjusts the sound positionfor the front seats.

6-14 Infotainment

All Positions: The sound isadjusted for all seats.

To adjust the sound position:


2. Select Position and then selectthe desired sound position.


Speed-Dependant VolumeControl (SDVC)

SDVC automatically adjusts thevolume for road and wind noise asthe vehicle increases or decreasesspeed while driving.

To adjust SDVC:

1. Press SOUND, then SETTINGSand select Volume fromthe menu.

2. Select SDVC.

3. Turn the multifunction knob toadjust the level.


OnStar® Volume

For vehicles with OnStar, the OnStarVolume is used to set the maximuminitial volume level for the OnStarsystem when it is turned on.

To set OnStar Volume:


2. Select OnStar IN.



Start-up Volume

The Start-up Volume is used to setthe maximum initial volume levelfor the audio system when itis turned on.

The maximum initial volume level isused when the volume level beforeturning the audio system off washigher than the maximum initialvolume level set, or if the volume isblow the maximum level.

To set the On Volume level:


2. Select Start-up Volume.



Infotainment 6-15

Using the Radio

FM/AM: Press to select betweenFM, FM-AS, AM, and AM-AS,or to listen to the radio while a CDis playing. The Tuner Menudisplays.

LOC (LOCAL/DX Function): Pressto change between LOC ON orLOC OFF. When the LOC functionis on, it searches for the strongestradio frequency. If none is found, itautomatically searches for aweaker radio frequency. If nofrequency is found after the secondsearch, the radio returns to thelast active frequency. If a newstation search is not started withinone minute, the low sensitivity(LOCAL) is set when the nextsearch is started. When LOC OFFis set, a search is carried outusing the high sensitivity (DX).

Finding an FM/AM Station

1 - 9 (Station Preset Buttons):Press to play stations that areprogrammed to the radio presetpushbuttons.

Automatic Station Search: Useautomatic station search whenthe radio frequency is unknown.

The radio is volume is mutedwhile the radio searches for astation with strong reception. If theradio is unable to find a station, itautomatically switches to a moresensitive search level. The radioreturns to the last station playing if itfails to locate a station.

To use automatic station search, doone of the following:

• Press and hold \ or ] untilseek displays.

• Select t or u from theradio menu with themultifunction knob.

Manual Station Search: Usemanual station search whenthe radio frequency is known.

To use manual station search withthe four-way switch:

• Press and hold _ or ^ until thedesired frequency is reached.

• Press _ or ^ repeatedly until thedesired frequency is reached.

To use manual station search withthe multifunction knob:

1. Select Manual from theTuner menu.

2. Turn the multifunction knob untilthe desired frequency is reachedand press the knob.

6-16 Infotainment

Setting Preset Stations

The radio can store up to36 stations using the stationpreset buttons:

• 9 FM

• 9 FM - AS (Autostore)

• 9 AM

• 9 AM - AS (Autostore)

Radio stations can be stored usingthe station preset buttons, themultifunction knob, and by usingAutostore.

To manually store stations using thestation preset buttons:

1. Select FM or AM and tune to thedesired radio station.

2. Press and hold one of the9 station preset buttons, the radiobriefly mutes and displays thepreviously stored station.The new station is stored andthe radio begins playing.

3. Repeat the steps for each radiostation to be stored.

To manually store stations using themultifunction knob:

1. Select the desired radio stationand select Store from the TunerMenu, a list of all storedstations is displayed.

2. Turn the multifunction knob tochoose the location for thestation to be stored and pressthe multifunction knob.

To store stations using Autostore:

1. Select FM or AM and then selectAutostore from the Tuner Menu.

2. The Autostore menu is displayed,and the automatic station storingis started.

3. The nine strongest stations in theselected band are stored to thepreset buttons.

Using the CD PlayerThe CDC 40 is capable of playingCDs, MP3 CD-Rs, and mixed modeCD-Rs that have both audio andMP3 tracks on it.

The CD changer holds a maximumof 6 CDs, and can play smaller3 inch (8 cm) single CDs with anadapter ring.

Loading a CD

To load CDs:

1. Press Z (Eject), theCD-Changer menu displays.

2. Select an empty CDcompartment using themultifunction knob, Please insertCD now displays.

3. Insert a CD into the slot, ReadingCD displays and a appears nextto the selected position.

4. Repeat Step 2 to loadadditional CDs.

Infotainment 6-17

Display Options

The display can be changeddepending on what type of CD is inthe CD player. The displayoptions are:

• Disabled ( o ): Track number,CD number, album numberand playing time for an audio CD.

• Enabled ( a ): CD name,track name, artist name,and album name for an audio CDwith CD text.


1. Select Extras from the CD Menu.

2. Enable or disable the Displaytrack box.

Playing a CD

CDC: Press to play a CD that isalready loaded into the CDplayer while the radio is playing.The CD Menu displays.

Selecting a Track

Tracks can be selected using thefour-way switch or the CD menufunctions.

Selecting a track using the four-wayswitch:

\ or ]: Press to go to the next orprevious track within a CD.

Selecting a track using the CDmenu and the t or u function:

1. Turn the multifunction knob untilTrack is highlighted.

2. Press the multifunction knob untilthe desired track is displayed.

Selecting a track using the CD menuand the Track function:

1. Select Track from the CD menu.

2. Select the desired track fromthe menu.

Searching Within a Track

To search within a track using thefour-way switch or the CD menufunctions:

To search using the four-wayswitch:

1. Press and hold \ or ].

2. Release \ or ] when thedesired point in the track isreached.

To search using the CD menu

1. Select r or [.

2. Select r or [ again when thedesired point in the track isreached.

Selecting CD

CDs can be selected by:

• Pressing the appropriate stationpreset button.

• Pressing _ or ^ on the four-wayswitch.

• Using the CD menu function.

6-18 Infotainment

To use the CD menu function:

1. Select CD from the CD menu.

2. Select the desired CD.

Random Mode

There are two modes for random:

• Random play CD.

• Random magazine.

Tracks on the current CD areplayed in random order for Randomplay CD:

To use Random play CD:

1. Select Extras from the CD menu.

2. Select Random CD, and Tdisplays.

To turn off random:


2. Select Normal, and Tdisappears.

4 tracks per CD are played beforechanging to the next CD for Randommagazine:

To use random for all CDs:


2. Select Random Magazine, andU displays.

To turn off random:


2. Select Normal, and Udisappears.

Repeat Track

The Repeat function repeats thecurrent track. The function canbe enabled and disabled by usingthe four-way switch or the CD menu.

To use repeat using the four-wayswitch:

1. Press and hold _ until S appearson the display.

2. Press and hold ^ until S is nolonger on the display to turnoff repeat track.

To use repeat using the CD menu:


2. Select Repeat Track, S appearson the display.

To turn off repeat using theCD menu:


2. Select Normal, S disappearsfrom the display.

Scan CD

The Scan CD function scans thefirst ten seconds of each trackon the current CD. The function canbe enabled and disabled by usingthe four-way switch or the CD menu.

Infotainment 6-19

To use Scan CD using the four-wayswitch:

1. Press and hold _ until uappears on the display.

2. Press and hold ^ until u is nolonger on the display to turn offrepeat track.

To use Scan CD using theCD menu:


2. Select Scan CD, u appearson the display.

To turn off Scan CD using theCD menu:


2. Select Scan CD, u disappearsfrom the display.

Ejecting a CD

To eject a CD:

1. Press Z.

2. Select the desired CD to eject byusing the station preset buttonsor the multifunction knob.

To eject all CDs:

1. Press and hold Z until Eject allCDs displays.

2. Press the multifunction knob toconfirm. The CDs are ejected.

Using an MP3 or MixedMode CDSupported File Structure

The CDC 40 supports up to:

• 253 albums.

• 65,535 tracks.

• Bit rates up to 256 kbps.

File Naming

Files must be named .mp3 for theCD to work. ID3 tags are supported.The following information showson the display when a CD MP3, ora mixed mode CD is playing.

• CD number

• Album name

• Track title and artist

Playing an MP3 or MixedMode CD

CDC: Press to play an MP3 CDthat is already loaded into theCD player while the radio is playing.The CD Menu displays.

Selecting a Track

Tracks can be selected using thefour-way switch or the CD menufunctions.

Selecting a track using the four-wayswitch:

\ or ]: Press to go to the next orprevious track within an album.

6-20 Infotainment

Selecting a track using the CDmenu and the t or u function:

1. Turn the multifunction knob untilis highlighted.

2. Press the multifunction knob untilthe desired track is displayed.

Selecting a track using the CD menuand the Track function:

1. Select Track from the CD menu.

2. Select the desired track fromthe menu.

Searching Within a Track

To search within a track using thefour-way switch or the CD menufunctions:

To search using the four-wayswitch:

1. Press and hold \ or ].

2. Release \ or ] when thedesired point in the track isreached.

To search using the CD menu

1. Select r or [.

2. Select r or [ again when thedesired point in the track isreached.

Selecting an MP3 or Mixed ModeAlbum

CDs can be selected by:

• Pressing the appropriate stationpreset button.

• Pressing _ or ^ on the four-wayswitch.

• Using the CD menu function.

To use the CD menu function:

1. Select Album from the CD menu.

2. Select the desired Album.

Random Mode

MP3 CDs and Mixed Mode CDs canbe played in random order. Thereare two modes for random:

• Random play CD.

• Random magazine.

To turn off random:


2. Select Normal.

Tracks play in the following order forRandom play CD:

• MP3 CD: If there are five orfewer albums on an MP3CD, four tracks per album areplayed in random order. If thereare more than five albums onthe MP3 CD, one track is playedper album. Tracks from theselected album are playedrandomly.

• Mixed Mode CD: On a MixedMode CD, the tracks from theaudio part are played firstin random order. Then the tracksfrom the MP3 part are playedas described above.

To use Random play CD:


2. Select Random CD, Tdisplays.

Infotainment 6-21

Tracks play in the following order forRandom magazine:

• MP3 CD: If there are five orfewer albums on an MP3CD, four tracks per album areplayed before changing tothe next CD. If there are morethan five albums, one trackper album is played beforechanging to the next CD.

• Mixed Mode CD: On a MixedMode CD, the first of all fourtracks from the audio partare played in random order andthen the system changes tothe next CD. The next time thesystem changes to the MixedMode CD, the tracks fromthe MP3 part are played asdescribed above.

To use random for all CDs:


2. Select Random Magazine,U displays.

Care of CD’s and the CDPlayerCare of CDs

Store CDs in their original cases orother protective cases and awayfrom direct sunlight and dust. The CDplayer scans the bottom of the disc. Ifthe bottom of a CD is damaged itmay not play properly or at all. Do nottouch the bottom of a CD whilehandling it. Pick up CDs by graspingthe outer edges or the edge of thehole and the outer edge.

If the surface of a CD is dirty, take asoft, lint free cloth or dampen aclean, soft cloth in a mild, neutraldetergent solution mixed with water,and clean it. Make sure the wipingprocess starts from the center tothe edge.

Care of the CD Player

Do not add labels to a CD, it couldget caught in the CD player. Use amarking pen to write on the top of theCD if a description is needed.

Do not use CD lens cleaners, theycould damage the CD player.

Notice: If a label is added to aCD, or more than one CD isinserted into the slot at a time, oran attempt is made to playscratched or damaged CDs, theCD player could be damaged.While using the CD player,use only CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load oneCD at a time, and keep the CDplayer and the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, anddebris.

6-22 Infotainment

Theft-Deterrent FeatureThe audio system is equippedwith an electronic safety system toprevent theft, and only works inthe vehicle.

Audio Steering WheelControls

Some audio controls can beadjusted at the steering wheel.

Several functions of the audiosystem can be operated with theaudio remote control buttons and therotary control located on bothsides of the steering wheel.

Depending on the vehicle’s features,see the following audio controls:

Z (Rotary Control): Manually seeka station by turning to move thecursor either to the previous or nextscreen entry. Press to confirmthe selection.

For the DIC (Driver InformationCenter), press the rotary control tocall up the DIC menu. Press toreset the current value. Press andhold for two seconds to resetall of the values.

Y : Press to go to the next presetstation if playing the radio.

Press to go to the beginning of acurrently playing CD or to thenext album on an MP3.

X : Press to toggle between theradio and CD or MP3 as anactive source for playback.

^ / _: Press the arrows to go backor advance to the previous ornext preset station if playing theradio. Press and hold to scrollthrough the preset stations.

Press to go back or advance onetrack at a time on a CD.

Press to quickly reverse or advancethrough the tracks within a CD.

3 (volume): Turn the rotarycontrol to adjust the volume. Pressand hold to adjust the volumecontinuously.

Infotainment 6-23

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as cell phonechargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronicdevices are plugged into theaccessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug the itemfrom the accessory power outlet.

AMThe range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especiallyat night. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interferewith each other. For better radioreception, most AM radio stationsboost the power levels duringthe day, and then reduce theselevels during the night. Staticcan also occur when things likestorms and power lines interferewith radio reception. When thishappens, try reducing the treble onyour radio.

FM StereoFM stereo gives the best sound, butFM signals reach only about 10 to40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildingsor hills can interfere with FM signals,causing the sound to fade in and out.

Cellular Phone UsageCellular phone usage may causeinterference with the vehicle’s radio.This interference may occur whenmaking or receiving phone calls,charging the phone’s battery,or simply having the phone on. Thisinterference causes an increasedlevel of static while listening tothe radio. If static is received whilelistening to the radio, unplug thecellular phone and turn it off.

Fixed Mast AntennaThe fixed mast antenna canwithstand most car washes withoutbeing damaged, or it can beremoved. If the mast should everbecome slightly bent, straightenit out by hand. If the mast is badlybent, replace it.

Check occasionally to make surethe mast is still tightened to theantenna base located on the roof ofthe vehicle.

6-24 Infotainment

Climate Controls

Climate ControlsClimate Control System ......7-1Outlet Adjustment ...............7-4

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemThe heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.

A. Air ConditioningB. RecirculationC. Rear Window Defogger

D. Air Delivery Mode ControlE. Temperature ControlF. Fan Control

Climate Controls 7-1

Air Delivery Mode Control:Turn the knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to adjust theairflow direction inside the vehicle.

To change the current air deliverymode, select one of the following:

) (Bi-Level): Air is directed tothe instrument panel and flooroutlets. Cooler air is directed to theupper outlets and warmer air tothe floor outlets.

Y (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

X (Defog): Air is directed to thewindshield and front door windows.To reduce fogging, press # toturn on the air conditioner. The fanmust also be on.

W (Defog/Floor): Air is directed tothe windshield, front door windows,and floor outlets. To reducefogging, press # to turn on the airconditioner. The fan must alsobe on.

[ (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets.

Temperature Control: Turn theknob clockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease thetemperature inside the vehicle.

Fan Control: Turn the knobclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the fan speed.The speed settings can be adjustedbetween 1 (Low) and 4 (High).

Turn the knob to A to turn the fanoff. When the fan is off, the airconditioning compressor is also off.There will be some airflow from theoutlets when driving, even with thefan in the off position.

Air ConditioningFor vehicles with air conditioning.

# (Air Conditioning): Pressto turn the air conditioning systemon or off. An indicator light comes onwhen the air conditioning is on.The air conditioning can onlybe operated if the engine is on andthe fan is running.

When the air conditioning is on theair is cooled and dehumidified. Ifcooling or dehumidification isnot desired, turn off the airconditioning to save fuel.

On hot days, open the windowsbriefly to let the hot inside airescape, then close them. This helpsto reduce the time it takes for thevehicle to cool down.

7-2 Climate Controls

For quicker cool down, do thefollowing:

1. Press # to turn on the airconditioning.

2. Select Y mode.

3. Set the temperature knob to thecoldest temperature.

4. Set the fan knob to 4.

5. Open all vents.

Recirculation

^ (Recirculation): Press toturn the recirculation mode on or off.An indicator light inside the buttoncomes on when the recirculationmode is active. This moderecirculates air inside the passengercompartment and prevents outsideair from entering the vehicle.

The quality of the passengercompartment air may decreasesince the amount of outsideair entering the vehicle is reduced.

When the recirculation mode isused without air conditioning, the airhumidity increases, and thewindows may fog. Avoid using therecirculation mode during highperiods of humidity or cool outsidetemperatures since this mayresult in increased window fogging.If window fogging is experienced,select the defrost mode.

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses awarming grid to remove fog from therear window.

The rear window defogger will onlywork when the ignition is inON/RUN.

= (Rear Window Defogger):Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. An indicator lightinside the button will be lit whenin use.

If the vehicle has heated mirrors,they turn on when the rear windowdefogger button is pressed.Press the button again to turn themoff. For more information, seeOutside Power Mirror(s) onpage 2-12.

The rear window defogger will stayon for approximately 15 minutesafter the button is pressed, unlessthe ignition is turned off.

Notice: Do not use anythingsharp on the inside of the rearwindow. If you do, you could cutor damage the warming grid, andthe repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Do notattach a temporary vehiclelicense, tape, a decal or anythingsimilar to the defogger grid.

Climate Controls 7-3

Outlet AdjustmentUse the thumbwheel below the airoutlets to change the direction of theair flow. Use the vertical thumbwheelnext to the outlets to control theamount of air flow or to shut off theairflow completely.

Keep all outlets open wheneverpossible for best systemperformance.

Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow, or

leaves from the air inlets atthe base of the windshield thatcan block the flow of air intothe vehicle.

• Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors can adversely affectthe performance of the system.

• Keep the path under all seatsclear of objects to help circulatethe air inside the vehiclemore effectively.

• If fogging reoccurs while in ventor bi-level modes with mildtemperature throughout thevehicle, turn on the airconditioner to reduce windshieldfogging.

7-4 Climate Controls

Driving andOperating

Starting and OperatingYour VehicleNew Vehicle Break-In .........8-2Ignition Positions ................8-2Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) .....................8-3

Starting the Engine .............8-3Engine Heater ....................8-5Automatic TransmissionOperation ..........................8-6

Manual TransmissionOperation ..........................8-9

Parking Brake ...................8-10Shifting Into Park ..............8-11Shifting Out of Park ..........8-12Parking the Vehicle ...........8-13Parking Over ThingsThat Burn ........................8-13

Engine Exhaust .................8-14Running the VehicleWhile Parked ..................8-14

Driving Your VehicleDriving for Better FuelEconomy .........................8-15

Defensive Driving ..............8-16Drunk Driving ....................8-16Control of a Vehicle ..........8-17Braking .............................8-17Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) .................8-18

StabiliTrak® System ..........8-19Steering ............................8-20Off-Road Recovery ............8-21Passing .............................8-22Loss of Control .................8-22Driving at Night .................8-23Driving in Rain and onWet Roads ......................8-24

Before Leaving on aLong Trip ........................8-25

Highway Hypnosis .............8-25Hill and MountainRoads .............................8-26

Winter Driving ...................8-27

If Your Vehicle is Stuckin Sand, Mud, Ice,or Snow ..........................8-29

Rocking Your Vehicle toGet It Out .......................8-29

Loading the Vehicle ..........8-30

FuelFuel ..................................8-34Gasoline Octane ...............8-34Gasoline Specifications .....8-34California Fuel ..................8-34Additives ...........................8-34Fuels in ForeignCountries ........................8-35

Filling the Tank .................8-36Filling a Portable FuelContainer ........................8-37

Driving and Operating 8-1

Starting andOperating YourVehicle

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: The vehicle doesnot need an elaborate break-in.But it will perform better inthe long run if you follow theseguidelines:

• Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 500 miles (805 km).Do not make full-throttlestarts. Avoid downshifting tobrake or slow the vehicle.

• Avoid making hard stops forthe first 200 miles (322 km)or so. During this time the newbrake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops with newlinings can mean prematurewear and earlier replacement.Follow this breaking-inguideline every time you getnew brake linings.

Following break-in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.

Ignition Positions

Use the key to turn the ignitionswitch to four different positions.

Notice: Using a tool to force thekey to turn in the ignition couldcause damage to the switch orbreak the key. Use the correct key,make sure it is all the way in, andturn it only with your hand. If thekey cannot be turned by hand, seeyour dealer/retailer.

To shift out of P (Park), the ignitionmust be in the ON/RUN positionand the regular brake pedal must beapplied.

A (LOCK/OFF): This is the onlyposition from which you can removethe key. This locks the steeringwheel, ignition and automatictransmission.

On vehicles with an automatictransmission, the shift lever must bein P (Park) to turn the ignitionswitch to the LOCK/OFF position.

The ignition switch can bind in theLOCK/OFF position with your wheelsturned off center. If this happens,move the steering wheel from rightto left while turning the key toSTEERING UNLOCK/IGNITIONOFF. If this doesn’t work, then thevehicle needs service.

B (STEERING UNLOCKED/IGNITION OFF): This positionunlocks the steering wheel.

8-2 Driving and Operating

C (ON/RUN): The ignition switchstays in this position when theengine is running. This position canbe used to operate the electricalaccessories, as well as to displaysome warning and indicator lights.

The battery could be drained if youleave the key in the ON/RUN positionwith the engine off. You may not beable to start the vehicle if the batteryis allowed to drain for an extendedperiod of time.

D (START): This position starts theengine. When the engine starts,release the key. The ignition switchwill return to ON/RUN for normaldriving. A warning tone willsound when the driver door isopened and the key is in the ignition.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)The power windows and mirrorsmay be used for up to five minutesafter the key is turned toLOCK/OFF.

The power windows and mirrors willnot operate after any of the frontdoors are opened.

The radio may be used for up tosixty minutes after the key is turnedto LOCK/OFF.

Starting the EngineAutomatic TransmissionMove the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart theengine when the vehicle is alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift toP (Park) if the vehicle is moving.If you do, you could damagethe transmission. Shift to P (Park)only when the vehicle is stopped.

Manual TransmissionThe shift lever should be inN (Neutral) and the parking brakeengaged. Hold the clutch pedalto the floor and start the engine. Thevehicle will not start if the clutchpedal is not all the way down.


Starting Procedure1. With your foot off the accelerator

pedal, turn the ignition key toSTART. When the engine starts,let go of the key. The idle speedwill go down as the engine getswarm. Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently to allow theoil to warm up and lubricate allmoving parts.The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists instarting the engine and protectscomponents. If the ignition key isturned to the START position,and then released when theengine begins cranking, theengine will continue cranking for afew seconds or until the vehiclestarts. If the engine does not startand the key is held in START formany seconds, cranking will bestopped after 15 seconds toprevent cranking motor damage.

To prevent gear damage, thissystem also prevents cranking ifthe engine is already running.Engine cranking can be stoppedby turning the ignition switch toSTEERING UNLOCKED/IGNITION OFF or LOCK/OFF.

Notice: Cranking the engine forlong periods of time, by returningthe key to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not startafter 5-10 seconds, especiallyin very cold weather (below 0°For −18°C), it could be flooded withtoo much gasoline. Try pushingthe accelerator pedal all the wayto the floor and holding it there asyou hold the key in START for upto a maximum of 15 seconds.

Wait at least 15 seconds betweeneach try, to let the cranking motorcool down. When the enginestarts, let go of the key andaccelerator. If the vehicle startsbriefly but then stops again, dothe same thing. This clears theextra gasoline from the engine.Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates allmoving parts.

Notice: The engine is designed towork with the electronics in thevehicle. If you add electrical partsor accessories, you could changethe way the engine operates.Before adding electricalequipment, check with yourdealer/retailer. If you do not, theengine might not performproperly. Any resulting damagewould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.


Engine HeaterThe engine heater can provideeasier starting and better fueleconomy during engine warm-upin cold weather conditions at orbelow − 4°F (− 20°C). Vehicles withan engine heater should be pluggedin at least four hours before starting.

To Use the Engine Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. The engine heater connector islocated in the passenger sidelower front grille. Open the coverand insert the 110-volt ACadapter delivered in the vehiclesglove box.

3. Plug the other end of the adapterinto a grounded 110-volt ACoutlet.

{ CAUTION

Plugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could cause anelectrical shock. Also, the wrongkind of extension cord couldoverheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plugthe cord into a properly groundedthree-prong 110-volt AC outlet.If the cord will not reach, use aheavy-duty three-prong extensioncord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug both ends ofthe adapter and store the adapterto prevent damage.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer/retailerin the area where you will beparking the vehicle for the bestadvice on this.


Automatic TransmissionOperation

If the vehicle has an automatictransmission, the shift leveris located on the console betweenthe seats.

The vehicle may also have anelectronic shift position indicator thatdisplays the position of the shiftlever. This indicator is located abovethe trip odometer on the instrumentpanel cluster.

P (Park): This position locks thefront wheels. It is the best position touse when the engine is startedbecause the vehicle cannot moveeasily.

{ CAUTION

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless you haveto. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, always set theparking brake and move the shiftlever to P (Park). See Shifting IntoPark on page 8-11.

Make sure the shift lever is fully inP (Park) before starting theengine. The vehicle has anautomatic transmission shift lockcontrol system. The regular brakesmust be applied before you canshift from P (Park) when the ignitionkey is in ON/RUN. If you cannotshift out of P (Park) while holding thebrake pedal down, see ShiftingOut of Park on page 8-12.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse)only after the vehicle is stopped.

To rock the vehicle back andforth to get out of snow, ice, or sandwithout damaging the transmission,see Rocking Your Vehicle to GetIt Out on page 8-29.


N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect with thewheels. To restart the enginewhen the vehicle is already moving,use N (Neutral) only. Also, useN (Neutral) when the vehicle isbeing towed.

{ CAUTION

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shift intoa drive gear while the engine isrunning at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park)or N (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be surethe engine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving.

Notice: If the vehicle seems tostart up rather slowly or not shiftgears when you go faster, andyou continue to drive the vehiclethat way, you could damagethe transmission. Have thevehicle serviced right away.

3 (Third): This position is also usedfor normal driving, however, itoffers more power and lower fueleconomy than D (Drive). Hereare some times you might choose3 (Third) instead of D (Drive):

• When driving on hilly, windingroads.

• When going down a steep hill.

2 (Second): This position gives youmore power but lower fueleconomy. Use 2 (Second) on hills.It can help control the vehiclesspeed as you go down steepmountain roads, while using thebrakes off and on.

Notice: Driving in 1 (First) formore than 25 miles (40 km) or atspeeds over 55 mph (90 km/h)may damage the transmission.Also, shifting into 1 (First) atspeeds above 65 mph (105 km/h)can cause damage. Drive in3 (Third) or D (Drive) instead of1 (First).

1 (First): This position gives youeven more power but lowerfuel economy than 2 (Second). Useit on very steep hills, or in deepsnow or mud. If the shift lever is putin 1 (First), the transmission doesnot shift into first gear until thevehicle is going slowly enough.

Notice: Spinning the tiresor holding the vehicle in oneplace on a hill using only theaccelerator pedal may damagethe transmission. The repair willnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. If you are stuck, do notspin the tires. When stopping on ahill, use the brakes to hold thevehicle in place.


Winter Driving ModeThis feature helps you accelerate inslippery driving conditions by using3 (Third) gear when you begin toaccelerate from a stopped position.

The winter driving mode button islocated on the center console.

Press once to turn on the winterdriving mode feature. The vehiclewill be in 3 (Third) gear whenthe vehicle begins to move. Oncethe vehicle is moving, the vehicle willupshift normally.

The Winter Driving Mode is turnedoff by one of the following:

• Pressing the winter driving modebutton again.

• Manually shifting to 2 (Second)or 1 (First) gear.

• Turning off the ignition.

To protect the transmission, thewinter program turns offautomatically at high transmissionoil temperatures.

Automatic Neutral IdleThe Automatic Neutral Idle shiftfunction automatically sets thetransmission to N (Neutral) toreduce fuel consumption when thevehicle is not moving.

Automatic neutral is activated whenALL of the following occurs:

• The selector lever is in D (Drive),3 (Third), 2 (Second) or1 (First) gear.

• The foot brake is pressed.

• The vehicle is stopped.

• The accelerator pedal is notpressed.

• The transmission fluidtemperature is greater than0° C (32° F).

• The road is not steeper than 15°.

When you release the brake withthe transmission in gear, youmay feel the transmission shift fromN (Neutral) to D (Drive)automatically. You may also feel thetransmission shift from D (Drive)to N (Neutral) when the brakeis applied. This is normal operationof the automatic transmission.


Downhill Grade AssistWhen traveling down steep gradesthe transmission may automaticallydownshift into a lower gear when thebrake is applied. You may feel thisdownshift. This performance featureof the automatic transmission assistswith engine braking to reduce wearon your brake system. This is normaloperation of the automatictransmission.

Performance On DemandThis feature allows the driver toautomatically force a downshift,when traveling at speeds less thanapproximately 70 mph (112 km/h),by fully pressing the acceleratorpedal.

Manual TransmissionOperationFive-Speed

This is the shift pattern.

Here is how to operate the manualtransmission:

1 (First): Press the clutch pedaland shift into 1 (First). Then, slowlylet up on the clutch pedal as youpress the accelerator pedal.

You can shift into 1 (First) whenyou are going less than 20 mph(32 km/h). If you have come to acomplete stop and it is hard to shiftinto 1 (First), put the shift lever inN (Neutral) and let up on the clutch.Press the clutch pedal back down.Then shift into 1 (First).

2 (Second): Press the clutch pedalas you let up on the acceleratorpedal and shift into 2 (Second).Then, slowly let up on the clutchpedal as you press the acceleratorpedal.

3 (Third), 4 (Fourth) and 5 (Fifth):Shift into 3 (Third), 4 (Fourth)and 5 (Fifth), the same way you dofor 2 (Second). Slowly let up onthe clutch pedal as you pressthe accelerator pedal.

To stop, let up on the acceleratorpedal and press the brakepedal. Just before the vehicle stops,press the clutch pedal and thebrake pedal, and shift to N (Neutral).

N (Neutral): Use this positionwhen you start or idle the engine.


R (Reverse):

With the vehicle stationary, wait threeseconds after declutching and pull upon the button on the selector lever toengage R (Reverse) gear.

If R (Reverse) gear does not engage,set the selector lever in N (Neutral),and release the clutch pedal. Pressthe clutch pedal again and repeat thegear selection.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse)only after the vehicle is stopped.

Also, use R (Reverse), alongwith the parking brake, to park thevehicle.

Shift Speeds

{ CAUTION

If you skip a gear when youdownshift, you could lose controlof the vehicle. You could injureyourself or others. Do not shiftdown more than one gear at atime when you downshift.

Parking Brake

The parking brake is locatedbetween the driver and passengerseats.

To set the parking brake, hold thebrake pedal down and pull up on theparking brake lever.

To release the parking brake, holdthe brake pedal down. Pull theparking brake lever up until you canpress the release button. Holdthe release button in as you movethe brake lever all the way down.


A warning chime will sound and abrake warning light located on theinstrument panel cluster will comeon, if the parking brake is set, theignition is on and the vehicle speed isgreater than 5 mph (8 km/h).

Notice: Driving with the parkingbrake on can overheat thebrake system and causepremature wear or damage tobrake system parts. Makesure that the parking brake isfully released and the brakewarning light is off before driving.

Shifting Into Park

{ CAUTION

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow.

1. Hold the brake pedal down andset the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 8-10 formore information.

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)by holding in the button on theshift lever and pushing theshift lever all the way toward thefront of the vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.

4. Remove the key and take it withyou. If you can leave the vehiclewith the ignition key in yourhand, the vehicle is in P (Park).


Leaving the Vehicle with theEngine Running

{ CAUTION

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could move suddenlyif the shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, itcould overheat and even catchfire. You or others could beinjured. Do not leave the vehiclewith the engine running.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, be sure thevehicle is in P (Park) and the parkingbrake is firmly set before youleave it. After you have moved theshift lever into P (Park), holdthe regular brake pedal down. Then,see if you can move the shiftlever away from P (Park) withoutfirst pushing the button.

If you can, it means that the shiftlever was not fully locked inP (Park).

Torque LockIf you are parking on a hill and youdo not shift the transmission intoP (Park) properly, the weight of thevehicle may put too much force onthe parking pawl in the transmission.You may find it difficult to pull theshift lever out of P (Park). This iscalled torque lock. To prevent torquelock, set the parking brake and thenshift into P (Park) properly before youleave the driver seat. To find outhow, see Shifting Into Park onpage 8-11.

When you are ready to drive, movethe shift lever out of P (Park) beforeyou release the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you mayneed to have another vehiclepush your vehicle a little uphill totake some of the pressure from theparking pawl in the transmission,so you can pull the shift lever out ofP (Park).

Shifting Out of ParkThis vehicle has an electronic shiftlock release system. The shiftlock release is designed to:

• Prevent ignition key removalunless the shift lever is inP (Park) with the shift leverbutton fully released.

• Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of P (Park), unlessthe ignition is in the ON/RUNposition and the regular brakepedal is applied.

The shift lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (lessthan 9 volt) battery.


If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting onpage 9-69 for more information.

To shift out of P (Park) usethe following sequence:

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Press the shift lever button.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still are unable to shift out ofP (Park):

1. Fully release the shift leverbutton.

2. While holding down the brakepedal, press the shift leverbutton again.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still cannot move the shiftlever from P (Park), consultyour dealer/retailer or a professionaltowing service.

Parking the VehicleBefore you get out of the vehicle,move the shift lever into 1 (First) orR (Reverse) and firmly apply theparking brake. Once the shift leverhas been placed into 1 (First) orR (Reverse) with the clutchpedal pressed in, you can turn theignition off and release the clutch.

Parking Over ThingsThat Burn

{ CAUTION

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass, orother things that can burn.


Engine Exhaust

{ CAUTION

Engine exhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:• The vehicle idles in areas

with poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

• The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

• The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

• The vehicle’s exhaust systemhas been modified, damagedor improperly repaired.

• There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or after-marketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected or ifit is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

• Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

• Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.

Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running. But if you ever haveto, here are some things to know.

{ CAUTION

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains Carbon Monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. Formore information, see EngineExhaust on page 8-14.


{ CAUTION

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the automatictransmission shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll. Donot leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless you haveto. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, always set theparking brake and move the shiftlever to P (Park).

Follow the proper steps to be surethe vehicle will not move. SeeShifting Into Park on page 8-11.

Driving Your Vehicle

Driving for BetterFuel EconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.

• Avoid fast starts and acceleratesmoothly.

• Brake gradually and avoid abruptstops.

• Avoid idling the engine for longperiods of time.

• When road and weatherconditions are appropriate, usecruise control, if equipped.

• Always follow posted speed limitsor drive more slowly whenconditions require.

• Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

• Combine several trips into asingle trip.

• Replace the vehicle’s tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire’s sidewallnear the size.

• Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.


Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” Thefirst step in driving defensively is towear your safety belt, see SafetyBelts on page 1-8.

{ CAUTION

Assume that other road users(pedestrians, bicyclists, and otherdrivers) are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipatewhat they might do and be ready.In addition:

• Allow enough followingdistance between you andthe driver in front of you.

• Focus on the task of driving.

Driver distraction can causecollisions resulting in injury orpossible death. These simpledefensive driving techniques couldsave your life.

Drunk Driving

{ CAUTION

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking. Do not drink and drive orride with a driver who has beendrinking. Ride home in a cab; or ifyou are with a group, designate adriver who will not drink.

Death and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

Alcohol affects four things thatanyone needs to drive a vehicle:judgment, muscular coordination,vision, and attentiveness.

Police records show that almost40 percent of all motorvehicle-related deaths involvealcohol. In most cases, these deathsare the result of someone who wasdrinking and driving. In recent years,more than 17,000 annual motorvehicle-related deaths have beenassociated with the use of alcohol,with about 250,000 people injured.

For persons under 21, it is againstthe law in every U.S. state todrink alcohol. There are goodmedical, psychological, anddevelopmental reasons forthese laws.

The obvious way to eliminate theleading highway safety problemis for people never to drink alcoholand then drive.


Medical research shows that alcoholin a person’s system can make crashinjuries worse, especially injuriesto the brain, spinal cord, or heart.This means that when anyone whohas been drinking — driver orpassenger — is in a crash, thatperson’s chance of being killed orpermanently disabled is higher thanif the person had not been drinking.

Control of a VehicleThe following three systems helpto control the vehicle whiledriving — brakes, steering, andaccelerator. At times, as whendriving on snow or ice, it is easy toask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide.Meaning, you can lose control ofthe vehicle.

Adding non-dealer/non-retaileraccessories can affect vehicleperformance. See Accessories andModifications on page 9-3.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light onpage 4-16.

Braking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Decidingto push the brake pedal isperception time. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average reaction time is aboutthree-fourths of a second. But thatis only an average. It might beless with one driver and as long astwo or three seconds or morewith another. Age, physicalcondition, alertness, coordination,and eyesight all play a part. Sodo alcohol, drugs, and frustration.But even in three-fourths of asecond, a vehicle moving at 60 mph(100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m).That could be a lot of distance in anemergency, so keeping enoughspace between the vehicleand others is important.

And, of course, actual stoppingdistances vary greatly with thesurface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition ofthe road, whether it is wet, dry, or icy;tire tread; the condition of the brakes;the weight of the vehicle; and theamount of brake force applied.

Avoid needless heavybraking. Some people drive inspurts — heavy accelerationfollowed by heavy braking — ratherthan keeping pace with traffic.This is a mistake. The brakes mightnot have time to cool betweenhard stops. The brakes will wearout much faster with a lot of heavybraking. Keeping pace with thetraffic and allowing realistic followingdistances eliminates a lot ofunnecessary braking. That meansbetter braking and longer brake life.

If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump the brakes.If the brakes are pumped, thepedal could get harder to push down.


If the engine stops, there will still besome power brake assist but it will beused when the brake is applied.Once the power assist is used up, itcan take longer to stop and the brakepedal will be harder to push.

Adding non-dealer/non-retaileraccessories can affect vehicleperformance. See Accessories andModifications on page 9-3.

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the engine is started andthe vehicle begins to drive away,ABS checks itself. A momentarymotor or clicking noise mightbe heard while this test is going on,and it might even be noticed thatthe brake pedal moves a little. Thisis normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. SeeAntilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light on page 4-17.

Let us say the road is wet and youare driving safely. Suddenly, ananimal jumps out in front of you.You slam on the brakes and continuebraking. Here is what happenswith ABS:

A computer senses that the wheelsare slowing down. If one of thewheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately workthe brakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpthe driver steer around theobstacle while braking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a footup to the brake pedal or alwaysdecrease stopping distance. If youget too close to the vehicle infront of you, there will not be enoughtime to apply the brakes if thatvehicle suddenly slows or stops.Always leave enough room upahead to stop, even with ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly andlet antilock work. The antilock pumpor motor might be heard operating,and the brake pedal might befelt to pulsate, but this is normal.


Braking in EmergenciesABS allows the driver to steer andbrake at the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.

StabiliTrak® SystemThe vehicle may have StabiliTrakwhich combines antilock brake,traction and stability control systemsand helps the driver maintaindirectional control of the vehiclein most driving conditions.

When the vehicle is first started anddriven away, the system performsseveral diagnostic checks to ensurethere are no problems. The systemmay be heard or felt while it isworking. This is normal and does notmean there is a problem with thevehicle. The system should initializebefore the vehicle reaches 20 mph(32 km/h).

The system monitors vehiclemovements, and helps the drivermaintain control of the vehicle inmost driving situations. When thevehicle’s stability is affected theengine output is reduced, and thebrakes are applied to individualwheels.

This light on the instrument panelcluster will come on briefly when theignition is turned on.

StabiliTrak is automatically enabledwhenever the vehicle is started. Toassist the driver with vehicledirectional control, especially inslippery road conditions, the systemshould always be left on. The systemcan be turned off if needed.

It is recommended to leave thesystem on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn the system off if the vehicle isstuck in sand, mud, ice or snow, andyou want to “rock” the vehicle toattempt to free it. It may also benecessary to turn off the systemwhen driving in extreme off-roadconditions where high wheel spin isrequired. See If Your Vehicle is Stuckin Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow onpage 8-29.

StabiliTrak may also turn offautomatically if it determines that aproblem exists with the system.The light on the instrument panelcluster will be on solid to warnthe driver that StabiliTrak is disabledand requires service. If the problemdoes not clear after restartingthe vehicle, see your dealer/retailerfor service.


The g switch is located on theinstrument panel below the DriverInformation Center (DIC).

To turn off StabiliTrak, press andhold the g switch until the light in theswitch illuminates.

To turn StabiliTrak on again, pressthe g switch again or restart thevehicle.

A light in the switch should come onbriefly when the ignition key isturned to ON/RUN as a check thatthe light is working.

Adding non-dealer/non-retaileraccessories can affect the vehicle’sperformance. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 9-3 formore information.

SteeringIf the engine stalls while driving, thepower steering assist systemshould continue to operate until youare able to stop the vehicle. Ifpower steering assist is lost becausethe power steering system is notfunctioning, the vehicle can besteered but it will take more effort.

If you turn the steering wheel ineither direction several times until itstops, or hold the steering wheelin the stopped position for anextended amount of time, you maynotice a reduced amount ofpower steering assist. The normalamount of power steering assistshould return shortly after afew normal steering movements.

The power steering system does notrequire regular maintenance. If yoususpect steering system problemsand/or the Service Vehicle Soon lightcomes on, contact your dealer/retailer for service repairs.

Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at areasonable speed.

Traction in a curve depends on thecondition of the tires and theroad surface, the angle at which thecurve is banked, and vehiclespeed. While in a curve, speed isthe one factor that can be controlled.

If there is a need to reduce speed,do it before entering the curve,while the front wheels are straight.

Try to adjust the speed so youcan drive through the curve.Maintain a reasonable, steadyspeed. Wait to accelerate until outof the curve, and then accelerategently into the straightaway.


Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering canbe more effective than braking. Forexample, you come over a hill andfind a truck stopped in your lane, or acar suddenly pulls out from nowhere,or a child darts out from betweenparked cars and stops right in front ofyou. These problems can be avoidedby braking — if you can stop in time.But sometimes you cannot stop intime because there is no room.That is the time for evasiveaction — steering around theproblem.

The vehicle can perform very wellin emergencies like these. Firstapply the brakes. See Braking onpage 8-17. It is better to remove asmuch speed as possible from acollision. Then steer around theproblem, to the left or rightdepending on the space available.

An emergency like this requiresclose attention and a quick decision.If holding the steering wheel atthe recommended 9 and 3 o’clockpositions, it can be turned a full180 degrees very quickly withoutremoving either hand. But you haveto act fast, steer quickly, and justas quickly straighten the wheel onceyou have avoided the object.

The fact that such emergencysituations are always possible is agood reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wearsafety belts properly.

Off-Road RecoveryThe vehicle’s right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving.

If the level of the shoulder is onlyslightly below the pavement,recovery should be fairly easy.Ease off the accelerator and then, ifthere is nothing in the way, steer sothat the vehicle straddles the edgeof the pavement. Turn the steeringwheel 3 to 5 inches, 8 to 13 cm,(about one-eighth turn) until the rightfront tire contacts the pavementedge. Then turn the steering wheel togo straight down the roadway.


PassingPassing another vehicle on atwo-lane road can be dangerous.To reduce the risk of dangerwhile passing:

• Look down the road, to the sides,and to crossroads for situationsthat might affect a successfulpass. If in doubt, wait.

• Watch for traffic signs, pavementmarkings, and lines that couldindicate a turn or an intersection.Never cross a solid ordouble-solid line on your side ofthe lane.

• Do not get too close to the vehicleyou want to pass. Doing so canreduce your visibility.

• Wait your turn to pass a slowvehicle.

• When you are being passed, easeto the right.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving expertssay about what happens whenthe three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — donot have enough friction where thetires meet the road to do whatthe driver has asked.

In any emergency, do not give up.Keep trying to steer and constantlyseek an escape route or area ofless danger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control ofthe vehicle. Defensive drivers avoidmost skids by taking reasonable caresuited to existing conditions, and bynot overdriving those conditions.But skids are always possible.

The three types of skids correspondto the vehicle’s three controlsystems. In the braking skid, thewheels are not rolling. In the steeringor cornering skid, too much speedor steering in a curve causes tiresto slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, toomuch throttle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

If the vehicle starts to slide, easeyour foot off the accelerator pedaland quickly steer the way you wantthe vehicle to go. If you start steeringquickly enough, the vehicle maystraighten out. Always be ready for asecond skid if it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced whenwater, snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial is on the road. For safety,slow down and adjust your driving tothese conditions. It is important toslow down on slippery surfacesbecause stopping distance is longerand vehicle control more limited.


While driving on a surface withreduced traction, try your best toavoid sudden steering, acceleration,or braking, including reducing vehiclespeed by shifting to a lower gear.Any sudden changes could causethe tires to slide. You might notrealize the surface is slippery untilthe vehicle is skidding. Learn torecognize warning clues — such asenough water, ice, or packed snowon the road to make a mirroredsurface — and slow down when youhave any doubt.

Remember: Any Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) helps avoid only thebraking skid.

Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous thanday driving because some driversare likely to be impaired — by alcoholor drugs, with night vision problems,or by fatigue.

Night driving tips include:

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Reduce headlamp glare byadjusting the inside rearviewmirror.

• Slow down and keep more spacebetween you and other vehiclesbecause headlamps can onlylight up so much road ahead.

• Watch for animals.

• When tired, pull off the road.

• Do not wear sunglasses.

• Avoid staring directly intoapproaching headlamps.

• Keep the windshield and all glasson your vehicle clean — insideand out.

• Keep your eyes moving,especially during turns or curves.

No one can see as well at night asin the daytime. But, as we getolder, these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver might needat least twice as much light to seethe same thing at night as a20-year-old.


Driving in Rain and onWet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep-standing or flowing water.

{ CAUTION

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause yourvehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under your vehicle’stires so they actually ride onthe water. This can happen if theroad is wet enough and youare going fast enough. When yourvehicle is hydroplaning, it has little orno contact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice isto slow down when the road is wet.


Other Rainy Weather TipsBesides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:

• Allow extra following distance.

• Pass with caution.

• Keep windshield wipingequipment in good shape.

• Keep the windshield washer fluidreservoir filled.

• Have good tires with proper treaddepth. See Tires on page 9-40.

• Turn off cruise control.

Before Leaving on aLong TripTo prepare your vehicle for a longtrip, consider having it servicedby your dealer/retailer beforedeparting.

Things to check on your owninclude:

• Windshield Washer Fluid:Reservoir full? Windowsclean — inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: In good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Alllevels checked?

• Lamps: Do they all work and arelenses clean?

• Tires: Are treads good? Are tiresinflated to recommendedpressure?

• Weather and Maps: Safe totravel? Have up-to-date maps?

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attentionto your surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy, finda safe place to park your vehicleand rest.

Other driving tips include:

• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.

• Keep interior temperature cool.

• Keep your eyes moving — scanthe road ahead and to the sides.

• Check the rearview mirror andvehicle instruments often.


Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:

• Keep the vehicle servicedand in good shape.

• Check all fluid levels and brakes,tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

• Going down steep or long hills,shift to a lower gear.

{ CAUTION

If you do not shift down, thebrakes could get so hot that theywould not work well. You wouldthen have poor braking or evennone going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engineassist the brakes on a steepdownhill slope.

{ CAUTION

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. The brakes will haveto do all the work of slowing down

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

and they could get so hot thatthey would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. Youcould crash. Always have theengine running and the vehicle ingear when going downhill.

• Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in yourown lane.


• Top of hills: Be alert — somethingcould be in your lane (stalled car,accident).

• Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter DrivingDriving on Snow or IceDrive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.Wet ice can occur at about 32°F(0°C) when freezing rain begins tofall, resulting in even less traction.Avoid driving on wet ice or infreezing rain until roads can betreated with salt or sand.

Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gentlyso traction is not lost. Acceleratingtoo quickly causes the wheelsto spin and makes the surface underthe tires slick, so there is evenless traction.

Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)on page 8-18 improves vehiclestability during hard stops ona slippery roads, but apply thebrakes sooner than when ondry pavement.

Allow greater following distanceon any slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches can occuron otherwise clear roads in shadedareas. The surface of a curve or anoverpass can remain icy when thesurrounding roads are clear. Avoidsudden steering maneuvers andbraking while on ice.

Turn off cruise control, if equipped,on slippery surfaces.


Blizzard ConditionsBeing stuck in snow can be in aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use the RoadsideAssistance Program on page 12-6.To get help and keep everyonein the vehicle safe:

• Turn on the Hazard WarningFlashers on page 4-4.

• Tie a red cloth to an outsidemirror.

{ CAUTION

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This may causeexhaust gases to get inside.Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:• Clear away snow from

around the base of yourvehicle, especially any that isblocking the exhaust pipe.

• Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

• Open a window about twoinches (5 cm) on the side ofthe vehicle that is away fromthe wind to bring in fresh air.

• Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

• Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside thevehicle and set the fan speedto the highest setting. SeeClimate Control System in theIndex.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 8-14.

Snow can trap exhaust gasesunder your vehicle. This cancause deadly CO (carbonmonoxide) gas to get inside.CO could overcome you and killyou. You cannot see it or smell it,so you might not know it is in yourvehicle. Clear away snow fromaround the base of your vehicle,especially any that is blocking theexhaust.

Run the engine for short periodsonly as needed to keep warm,but be careful.

To save fuel, run the engine foronly short periods as neededto warm the vehicle and then shutthe engine off and close the windowmost of the way to save heat.


Repeat this until help arrives butonly when you feel reallyuncomfortable from the cold. Movingabout to keep warm also helps.

If it takes some time for helpto arrive, now and then when yourun the engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. Thiskeeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for helpwith the headlamps. Do this as littleas possible to save fuel.

If Your Vehicle is Stuckin Sand, Mud, Ice,or SnowSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get ItOut on page 8-29.

{ CAUTION

If you let your vehicle’s tires spinat high speed, they can explode,and you or others could beinjured. The vehicle can overheat,causing an engine compartmentfire or other damage. Spin thewheels as little as possible andavoid going above 35 mph(55 km/h) as shown on thespeedometer.

For information about using tirechains on the vehicle, see TireChains on page 9-60.

Rocking Your Vehicle toGet It OutTurn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area aroundthe front wheels. Turn off anystability system. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and aforward gear, or with a manualtransmission, between 1 (First) or2 (Second) and R (Reverse),spinning the wheels as little aspossible. To prevent transmissionwear, wait until the wheels stopspinning before shifting gears.Release the accelerator pedal whileshifting, and press lightly on theaccelerator pedal when thetransmission is in gear. Slowlyspinning the wheels in the forwardand reverse directions causes arocking motion that could freethe vehicle. If that does not get thevehicle out after a few tries, itmight need to be towed out. If thevehicle does need to be towedout, see Towing Your Vehicle onpage 9-73.


Loading the VehicleIt is very important to know howmuch weight your vehicle cancarry. This weight is calledthe vehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo and allnonfactory-installed options. Twolabels on your vehicle showhow much weight it may properlycarry, the Tire and LoadingInformation label and theCertification label.

{ CAUTION

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR), oreither the maximum front orrear Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR). If you do, parts onthe vehicle can break, and itcan change the way yourvehicle handles. These couldcause you to lose control andcrash. Also, overloading canshorten the life of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the vehicle’s centerpillar (B-pillar). With the driver’sdoor open, you will find the labelattached below the door lockpost. The Tire and LoadingInformation label shows thenumber of occupant seatingpositions (A), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (B) inkilograms and pounds.

Label Example


The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thetire size of the original equipmenttires (C) and the recommendedcold tire inflation pressures (D).For more information on tires andinflation see Tires on page 9-40and Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 9-47.

There is also important loadinginformation on the Certificationlabel. It tells you the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front andrear axle; see “CertificationLabel” later in this section.

Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit1. Locate the statement “The

combined weight of occupantsand cargo should neverexceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”on your vehicle placard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weightof the driver and passengersfrom XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX”amount equals 1400 lbsand there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle,the amount of available cargoand luggage load capacityis 650 lbs (1400 − 750(5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage andcargo being loaded on thevehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the availablecargo and luggage loadcapacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, the load from yourtrailer will be transferred toyour vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how thisreduces the available cargoand luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

The vehicle is neither designednor intended to tow a trailer.


A. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 1 = 1,000 lbs(453 kg).

B. Subtract Occupant Weight150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 = 300 lbs(136 kg).

C. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 700 lbs(317 kg).


B. Subtract Occupant Weight150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 = 750 lbs(340 kg).

C. Available CargoWeight = 250 lbs (113 kg).


B. Subtract Occupant Weight200 lbs(91 kg) × 5 = 1,000 lbs(453 kg).

C. Available CargoWeight = 0 lbs (0 kg).

Refer to the vehicle’s Tire andLoading Information label forspecific information about thevehicle’s capacity weight andseating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedthe vehicle’s capacity weight.

Example 1Example 2 Example 3


Certification Label

A vehicle specific Certificationlabel, found on the rear edgeof the driver’s door, tells you thegross weight capacity of thevehicle, called the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR). TheGVWR includes the weightof the vehicle, all occupants,fuel, and cargo. Never exceedthe GVWR for your vehicle,or the Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) for either the front orrear axle.

And, if you do have a heavyload, you should spread it out.See “Steps for DeterminingCorrect Load Limit” earlier in thissection.

{ CAUTION

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR), oreither the maximum front orrear Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR). If you do, parts onthe vehicle can break, and itcan change the way yourvehicle handles. These couldcause you to lose control andcrash. Also, overloading canshorten the life of the vehicle.

If you put things inside yourvehicle — like suitcases,tools, packages, or anythingelse — they will go as fast as thevehicle goes. If you have to stopor turn quickly, or if there is acrash, they will keep going.

{ CAUTION

Things you put inside thevehicle can strike and injurepeople in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash.

• Put things in the trunk ofyour vehicle. In a trunk,put them as far forward asyou can. Try to spread theweight evenly.

• Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

• Do not leave anunsecured child restraint inthe vehicle.

• When you carry somethinginside the vehicle, secureit whenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless you need to.

Label Example


FuelUse of the recommended fuelis an important part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. To helpkeep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, werecommend the use of gasolineadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Gasoline OctaneUse regular unleaded gasoline with aposted octane rating of 87 or higher.If the octane rating is less than 87,you might notice an audible knockingnoise when you drive, commonlyreferred to as spark knock. If thisoccurs, use a gasoline rated at87 octane or higher as soon aspossible. If you are using gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher and youhear heavy knocking, the engineneeds service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline shouldmeet ASTM specification D 4814in the United States orCAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in Canada.Some gasolines contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolinescontaining MMT. See Additives onpage 8-34 for additional information.

California FuelIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California emissionsstandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meeting federalspecifications, but emission controlsystem performance might beaffected. The malfunction indicatorlamp could turn on and the vehicle

might fail a smog-check test. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 4-18. If this occurs, return toyour authorized dealer/retailer fordiagnosis. If it is determined that thecondition is caused by the type offuel used, repairs might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolinesin the United States are nowrequired to contain additives thathelp prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowingthe emission control system to workproperly. In most cases, youshould not have to add anything tothe fuel. However, some gasolinescontain only the minimum amount ofadditive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agencyregulations. To help keep fuelinjectors and intake valves clean, orif the vehicle experiences problemsdue to dirty injectors or valves,look for gasoline that is advertisedas TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.


For customers who do not useTOP TIER Detergent Gasolineregularly, one bottle of GM FuelSystem Treatment PLUS, added tothe fuel tank at every engine oilchange, can help clean depositsfrom fuel injectors and intake valves.GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS isthe only gasoline additiverecommended by General Motors.

Also, your dealer/retailer hasadditives that will help correct andprevent most deposit-relatedproblems.

Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol, andreformulated gasolines might beavailable in your area. Werecommend that you use thesegasolines, if they comply with thespecifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than10% ethanol must not be used invehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered underthe vehicle warranty.

Some gasolines that arenot reformulated for lowemissions can contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendantwhere you buy gasoline whether thefuel contains MMT. We recommendagainst the use of such gasolines.Fuels containing MMT can reducethe life of spark plugs and theperformance of the emission controlsystem could be affected. Themalfunction indicator lamp mightturn on. If this occurs, return to yourdealer/retailer for service.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesIf you plan on driving in anothercountry outside the United States orCanada, the proper fuel might behard to find. Never use leadedgasoline or any other fuel notrecommended in the previous texton fuel. Costly repairs causedby use of improper fuel would notbe covered by the vehicle warranty.

To check the fuel availability, askan auto club, or contact a major oilcompany that does business inthe country where you will bedriving.


Filling the Tank

{ CAUTION

Fuel vapor burns violently and afuel fire can cause bad injuries.To help avoid injuries to you andothers, read and follow all theinstructions on the pump island.Turn off the engine when you arerefueling. Do not smoke if you arenear fuel or refueling the vehicle.Do not use cellular phones. Keepsparks, flames, and smokingmaterials away from fuel. Do notleave the fuel pump unattendedwhen refueling the vehicle. This isagainst the law in some places.Do not re-enter the vehicle whilepumping fuel. Keep children awayfrom the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.

The fuel cap is located behind ahinged fuel door on the passengerside of the vehicle.

To remove the fuel cap, turn itslowly counterclockwise.

The fuel cap has a spring in it, if thecap is released too soon it willspring back.

{ CAUTION

Fuel can spray out on you if youopen the fuel cap too quickly. Ifyou spill fuel and then somethingignites it, you could be badlyburned. This spray can happen ifthe tank is nearly full, and is morelikely in hot weather. Open thefuel cap slowly and wait for anyhiss noise to stop. Then unscrewthe cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not topoff or overfill the tank and wait a fewseconds after you have finishedpumping before removing the nozzle.Clean fuel from painted surfaces assoon as possible. See ExteriorCleaning on page 9-76.

When replacing the fuel cap, turnit clockwise until it clicks. Makesure the cap is fully installed.The diagnostic system candetermine if the fuel cap has beenleft off or improperly installed.


This would allow fuel to evaporateinto the atmosphere. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 4-18.

{ CAUTION

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuelcap, be sure to get the right type.Your dealer/retailer can get one foryou. If you get the wrong type, itmay not fit properly. This maycause the malfunction indicatorlamp to light and may damage thefuel tank and emissions system.See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 4-18.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ CAUTION

Never fill a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle. Staticelectricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite the fuelvapor. You can be badly burnedand the vehicle damaged if thisoccurs. To help avoid injury toyou and others:

• Dispense fuel only intoapproved containers.

• Do not fill a container while itis inside a vehicle, in avehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, oron any surface other than theground.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

• Bring the fill nozzle in contactwith the inside of the fillopening before operating thenozzle. Contact should bemaintained until the filling iscomplete.

• Do not smoke whilepumping fuel.

• Do not use a cellular phonewhile pumping fuel.


✍ NOTES


Vehicle Serviceand Care

ServiceService ...............................9-2Accessories andModifications .....................9-3

California Proposition 65Warning ............................9-3

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements .....9-3

Doing Your OwnService Work ....................9-4

Adding Equipment to theOutside of the Vehicle ......9-4

Owner ChecksOwner Checks ....................9-4Hood Release .....................9-5Engine CompartmentOverview ...........................9-6

Engine Oil ..........................9-7Engine Oil Life System .......9-9Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ...9-11

Automatic TransmissionFluid ................................9-12

Manual TransmissionFluid ................................9-12

Hydraulic Clutch ................9-12Cooling System .................9-12Engine Coolant .................9-16Pressure Cap ....................9-18Engine Overheating ...........9-18Power Steering Fluid .........9-20Windshield WasherFluid ................................9-20

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacement ...................9-21

Brakes ..............................9-22Battery ..............................9-25

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming ..............9-26

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement .............9-28Halogen Bulbs ..................9-28Front Turn SignalLamps .............................9-28

Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) .........9-29

Taillamps (Five-DoorHatchback) ......................9-30

Taillamps (Three-DoorHatchback) ......................9-32

License Plate Lamp ..........9-33Replacement Bulbs ...........9-34

Electrical SystemAdd-On ElectricalEquipment .......................9-34

Headlamp Wiring ..............9-34Fuses ...............................9-35Engine CompartmentFuse Block ......................9-35

Rear Compartment FuseBlock ...............................9-37

TiresTires .................................9-40Winter Tires ......................9-41Tire Sidewall Labeling .......9-42Tire Terminology andDefinitions .......................9-44

Inflation - Tire Pressure ....9-47High-Speed Operation .......9-48Tire Pressure MonitorSystem ............................9-49

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation ........................9-51

Tire Inspection andRotation ..........................9-52

Vehicle Service and Care 9-1

When It Is Time forNew Tires .......................9-54

Buying New Tires .............9-54Different Size Tires andWheels ............................9-56

Uniform Tire QualityGrading ...........................9-57

Wheel Alignment andTire Balance ....................9-58

Wheel Replacement ..........9-59Tire Chains .......................9-60

Tire ChangingIf a Tire Goes Flat ............9-60Changing a Flat Tire .........9-61Removing the Spare Tireand Tools ........................9-62

Removing the Flat Tireand Installing theSpare Tire .......................9-63

Storing a Flat or SpareTire and Tools .................9-66

Compact Spare Tire ..........9-68

Jump StartingJump Starting ...................9-69

TowingTowing Your Vehicle .........9-73Recreational VehicleTowing ............................9-73

Towing a Trailer ................9-73

Appearance CareInterior Cleaning ................9-73Exterior Cleaning ..............9-76Sheet Metal Damage ........9-79Finish Damage ..................9-79Underbody Maintenance ....9-80Chemical Paint Spotting ....9-80

ServiceFor service and parts needs,visit your dealer/retailer. You willreceive genuine Saturn partsand Saturn-trained and supportedservice people.

Genuine Saturn parts have one ofthese marks.

9-2 Vehicle Service and Care

Accessories andModificationsWhen non-dealer/non-retaileraccessories are added to thevehicle, they can affect vehicleperformance and safety, includingsuch things as airbags, braking,stability, ride and handling,emissions systems, aerodynamics,durability, and electronic systemslike antilock brakes, traction control,and stability control. Some ofthese accessories could even causemalfunction or damage notcovered by the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from the installation or useof non-GM certified parts, includingcontrol module modifications,are not covered under the terms ofthe vehicle warranty and mayaffect remaining warranty coveragefor affected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. Your GMdealer/retailer can accessorizethe vehicle using genuine GMAccessories. When you go to yourGM dealer/retailer and ask forGM Accessories, you will know thatGM-trained and supported servicetechnicians will perform the workusing genuine GM Accessories.

Also, see Adding Equipment toYour Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 1-36.

California Proposition 65WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of Californiato cause cancer and birth defectsor other reproductive harm.

Engine exhaust, many parts andsystems (including some inside thevehicle), many fluids, and somecomponent wear by-productscontain and/or emit these chemicals.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, seat belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries containedin remote keyless transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.


Doing Your OwnService Work

{ CAUTION

You can be injured and the vehiclecould be damaged if you try to doservice work on a vehicle withoutknowing enough about it.

• Be sure you have sufficientknowledge, experience, theproper replacement parts, andtools before attempting anyvehicle maintenance task.

• Be sure to use the propernuts, bolts, and otherfasteners. English and metricfasteners can be easilyconfused. If the wrongfasteners are used, partscan later break or fall off.You could be hurt.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much more

about how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 12-15.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do yourown service work, see AirbagSystem Check on page 1-37.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the dateof any service work performed. SeeMaintenance Record on page 11-16.

Adding Equipment tothe Outside of theVehicleThings added to the outside of thevehicle can affect the airflowaround it. This can cause windnoise and can affect fuel economyand windshield washer performance.Check with your dealer/retailerbefore adding equipment tothe outside of the vehicle.

Owner Checks

{ CAUTION

An electric fan under the hood canstart up and injure you even whenthe engine is not running. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ CAUTION

Things that burn can get on hotengine parts and start a fire.These include liquids like fuel, oil,coolant, brake fluid, windshieldwasher and other fluids, andplastic or rubber. You or otherscould be burned. Be careful not todrop or spill things that will burnonto a hot engine.


Hood ReleaseTo open the hood:

1. Pull the handle that is locatedunder the instrument panel.

2. Push the secondary hoodrelease lever upward.

3. Lift the hood.

After the hood is slightly lifted,it will continue to open to thefull position.

Before closing the hood, be sureall the filler caps are on properly.Then lift the hood to relievepressure. Pull the hood down,close it firmly.


Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood, this is what you will see:


A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 9-11.

B. Engine Oil Fill Cap. Engine Oilon page 9-7.

C. Brake Fluid Reservoir. Brakeson page 9-22.

D. Coolant Reservoir. CoolingSystem on page 9-12.

E. Coolant Reservoir Pressure Cap.Pressure Cap on page 9-18.

F. Engine Compartment Fuse Blockon page 9-35.

G. Battery on page 9-25.H. Windshield Washer Fluid on

page 9-20.I. Engine Oil Dipstick. Engine Oil

on page 9-7.

Engine Oil

If the low oil level light appears onthe instrument cluster, check theengine oil level right away. See LowOil Level Light on page 4-22.Check the engine oil level regularly;this is just a reminder.

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check theengine oil level at each fuel fill.In order to get an accurate reading,the oil must be warm and thevehicle must be on level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handleis a yellow loop. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 9-6for the location of the engine oildipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give theoil several minutes to drain backinto the oil pan. If this is notdone, the oil dipstick might notshow the actual level.

2. Pull the dipstick and clean it witha paper towel or cloth, then pushit back in all the way. Removeit again, keeping the tip down andcheck the level.


When to Add Engine OilIf the oil is below the MIN (minimum)mark, add at least one quart/liter ofthe recommended oil. This sectionexplains what kind of oil to use.For engine oil crankcase capacity,see Capacities and Specificationson page 10-2.

Notice: Do not add too much oil.If the engine has so much oilthat the oil level gets above theupper mark that shows the properoperating range, the enginecould be damaged.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 9-6 for the location of theengine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all theway back in when through.

What Kind of Engine Oil to UseLook for three things:

• GM6094M

Use only an oil that meetsGM Standard GM6094M.

• SAE 5W-30

SAE 5W-30 is best for thevehicle. These numbers on anoil container show its viscosity,or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such asSAE 20W-50.

• American Petroleum Institute(API) starburst symbol

Oils meeting these requirementsshould have the starburst symbolon the container. This symbolindicates that the oil has beencertified by the AmericanPetroleum Institute (API).


Notice: Use only engine oilidentified as meeting GM StandardGM6094M and showing theAmerican Petroleum InstituteCertified For Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. Failure to usethe recommended oil can resultin engine damage not covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Cold Temperature OperationIf in an area of extreme cold, wherethe temperature falls below −20°F(−29°C), use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30engine oil. Both provide easier coldstarting for the engine at extremelylow temperatures. Always usean oil that meets the requiredspecification, GM6094M.See “What Kind of Engine Oil toUse” for more information.

Engine Oil Additives / EngineOil FlushesDo not add anything to the oil.The recommended oils withthe starburst symbol that meetGM Standard GM6094M are all thatis needed for good performanceand engine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

Engine Oil Life SystemWhen to Change Engine OilThis vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is based onengine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage.Based on driving conditions,the mileage at which an oil changeis indicated can vary considerably.For the oil life system to workproperly, the system must be resetevery time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished,it indicates that an oil changeis necessary. The letters InSP willappear in the odometer display.Change the oil as soon as possiblewithin the mileage indicated onthe display. If driving under thebest conditions, the oil life systemmight indicate that an oil changeis necessary once a year.The engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year andat this time the system must bereset. Your dealer/retailer hastrained service people who willperform this work using genuineparts and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularlyand keep it at the proper level.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 3,000 miles (5 000 km)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.


How to Reset the Engine OilLife SystemThe Engine Oil Life Systemcalculates when to change theengine oil and filter based on vehicleuse. Whenever the oil is changed,reset the system so it can calculatewhen the next oil change is required.If a situation occurs where the oil ischanged prior to the letters InSPappearing in the odometer display,reset the system.

After changing the engine oil, resetthe system:

1. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.

2. Press the instrument panelcluster stem until the odometer isdisplayed, then release the stem.

3. Re-press and hold the clusterstem until the letters InSP aredisplayed.

4. Press and hold the brake pedaldown, hold the cluster stemdown, and turn the ignition keyto ON/RUN.

5. The letters InSP in the instrumentpanel cluster display will flash.

6. Keep the cluster stem down forat least 10 seconds and releasethe stem and the brake pedalwhen the message “newremaining milage” is displayed.

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer’s warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change your ownoil, be sure to drain all the oil from thefilter before disposal. Never disposeof oil by putting it in the trash, pouringit on the ground, into sewers, or intostreams or bodies of water. Recycleit by taking it to a place that collectsused oil.


Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 9-6 for the location ofthe engine air cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/FilterInspect the air cleaner/filter at theMaintenance II intervals and replaceit at the first oil change after each50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval.See “Schedule Maintenance”in Service and Maintenance for

more information. If you are drivingin dusty/dirty conditions, inspectthe filter at each engine oil change.

How to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/FilterTo inspect the air cleaner/filter,remove the filter from the vehicleand lightly shake the filter to releaseloose dust and dirt. If the filterremains caked with dirt, a new filteris required.

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter.

1. Remove the screws that hold thecover on.

2. Disconnect the electricalconnector.

3. Lift off the cover.

4. Inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter.

5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 toreinstall the cover and reconnectthe electrical connector.

{ CAUTION

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause youor others to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. If it is not there and theengine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with it off, andbe careful working on the enginewith the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filteris off, a backfire can causea damaging engine fire. And, dirtcan easily get into the engine,which will damage it. Always havethe air cleaner/filter in place whenyou are driving.


Automatic TransmissionFluidIt is not necessary to checkthe transmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is theonly reason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take your vehicle to thedealer/retailer service departmentand have it repaired as soonas possible.

Change the fluid and filter at theintervals listed in the MaintenanceSchedule. See “AdditionalRequired Services” in Service andMaintenance. Be sure to usethe transmission fluid listed in“Recommended Fluids andLubricants” in Service andMaintenance.

Notice: Use of the incorrectautomatic transmission fluidmay damage your vehicle, andthe damages may not becovered by your warranty.

See “Recommended Fluids andLubricants” in the LimitedWarranty, Maintenance and OwnerAssistance Information manual.

Manual TransmissionFluidIt is not necessary to check themanual transmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is theonly reason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to thedealer/retailer service departmentand have it repaired as soonas possible. You may also haveyour fluid level checked by yourdealer/retailer when you haveyour oil changed. See “Part D:Recommended Fluids andLubricants” in Service andMaintenance for the proper fluidto use.

Hydraulic ClutchThe hydraulic clutch linkage inyour vehicle is self-adjusting.This system does not have its ownreservoir. It receives fluid fromthe brake master cylinder reservoir.See Brakes on page 9-22 formore information.

Cooling SystemWhen you decide it is safe to lift thehood, this is what you see:

A. Coolant ReservoirB. Coolant Reservoir Pressure CapC. Engine Cooling Fans (Out of view)


{ CAUTION

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not running andcan cause injury. Keep hands,clothing, and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolantreservoir is boiling, do not doanything else until it cools down.The vehicle should be parked on alevel surface.

The coolant level should be at orabove the KALT/COLD mark on thecoolant reservoir. If it is not, youmay have a leak at the coolantreservoir pressure cap or in theradiator hoses, heater hoses,radiator, water pump, or somewhereelse in the cooling system.

{ CAUTION

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak,with the engine on, check to seeif the electric engine cooling fans arerunning. If the engine is overheating,both fans should be running.If they are not, your vehicle needsservice.

Notice: Engine damage fromrunning the engine withoutcoolant is not covered by thewarranty.

Notice: Using coolant otherthan DEX-COOL® can causepremature engine, heater core, orradiator corrosion. In addition,the engine coolant could requirechanging sooner, at 30,000 miles(50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first.Any repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always use DEX-COOL®

(silicate-free) coolant in thevehicle.


How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Reservoir

Notice: This vehicle has aspecific coolant fill procedure.Failure to follow this procedurecould cause the engine tooverheat and be severelydamaged.

If you have not found a problem yet,check to see if coolant is visiblein the coolant reservoir. If coolant isvisible but the coolant level is notat or above the KALT/COLD mark,add a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL®

coolant at the coolant reservoir,but be sure the cooling system,including the coolant reservoirpressure cap, is cool before youdo it. See Engine Coolant onpage 9-16 for more information.

If no coolant is visible in the coolantreservoir, add coolant as follows:

{ CAUTION

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. They areunder pressure, and if you turnthe coolant reservoir pressurecap — even a little — they cancome out at high speed. Neverturn the cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantreservoir pressure cap, is hot.Wait for the cooling system andcoolant reservoir pressure cap tocool if you ever have to turn thepressure cap.

{ CAUTION

Adding only plain water to thecooling system can be dangerous.Plain water, or some other liquidsuch as alcohol, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The vehicle’s coolant warningsystem is set for the propercoolant mixture. With plain wateror the wrong mixture, the enginecould get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning.The engine could catch fire andyou or others could be burned.Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL®

coolant.

Notice: In cold weather, watercan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core and otherparts. Use the recommendedcoolant and the proper coolantmixture.


{ CAUTION

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

1. Remove the coolant reservoirpressure cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantreservoir pressure cap and upperradiator hose, is no longer hot.Turn the coolant reservoirpressure cap slowlycounterclockwise about two ortwo and one-half turns.If you hear a hiss, wait for thatto stop. This will allow anypressure still left to be ventedout the discharge hose.

2. Keep turning the coolantreservoir pressure cap slowly,and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant reservoir withthe proper mixture, to theKALT/COLD mark. Wait aboutfive minutes, then check to seeif the level is below the mark.If the level is below theKALT/COLD mark, add additionalcoolant to bring the level up tothe mark. Repeat this procedureuntil the level remains constantat the KALT/COLD mark forat least five minutes.

4. With the coolant reservoirpressure cap off, start theengine and let it run until youcan feel the upper radiator hosegetting hot. Watch out for theengine cooling fans.By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant reservoir mightbe lower. If the level is lowerthan the KALT/COLD mark,add more of the propermixture to the coolant reservoiruntil the level reaches theKALT/COLD mark.

5. Replace the coolant reservoirpressure cap. Be sure thepressure cap is hand-tight andfully seated.

Coolant Reservoir Pressure Cap


Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicleis filled with DEX-COOL® enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in your vehicle for five yearsor 150,000 miles (240 000 km),whichever occurs first, if you addonly DEX-COOL® extended lifecoolant.

The following explains your coolingsystem and how to add coolantwhen it is low. If you have a problemwith engine overheating, seeEngine Overheating on page 9-18.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL® coolant will:

• Give freezing protection down to−34°F (−37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to265°F (129°C).

• Protect against rust andcorrosion.

• Help keep the proper enginetemperature.

• Let the warning lights and gageswork as they should.

Notice: Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can cause prematureengine, heater core, or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changingsooner, at the first maintenanceservice after each 30,000 miles(50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Anyrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Alwaysuse DEX-COOL® (silicate-free)coolant in the vehicle.

What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean,drinkable water and one-halfDEX-COOL® coolant which will notdamage aluminum parts. If youuse this coolant mixture, you do notneed to add anything else.

{ CAUTION

Adding only plain water to thecooling system can be dangerous.Plain water, or some other liquidsuch as alcohol, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The vehicle’s coolant warningsystem is set for the propercoolant mixture. With plain wateror the wrong mixture, the enginecould get too hot but would notget the overheat warning. Theengine could catch fire and you orothers could be burned. Use a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL® coolant.


Notice: If an improper coolantmixture is used, the engine couldoverheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Too much water in the mixturecan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, andother parts.

Notice: If you use extrainhibitors and/or additives inyour vehicle’s cooling system,you could damage your vehicle.Use only the proper mixture ofthe engine coolant listed inthis manual for the coolingsystem. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants in theMaintenance and LimitedWarranty and Owner AssistanceInformation manual.

Checking Coolant

The coolant reservoir is located inthe engine compartment on thedriver’s side of the vehicle.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 9-6 for more informationon location.

{ CAUTION

Turning the coolant reservoirpressure cap when the engineand radiator are hot can allowsteam and scalding liquids to blowout and burn you badly. Neverturn the coolant reservoir pressurecap – even a little – when theengine and radiator are hot.

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface. When your engine is cold,the coolant level should be atthe KALT/COLD line.

Do not overfill the coolant reservoir.Too much coolant can result inan overflow condition when thefluid is hot.


Adding CoolantIf you need more coolant, add theproper DEX-COOL® coolant mixtureat the coolant reservoir, but onlywhen the engine is cool. If thecoolant reservoir is empty, aspecial fill procedure is necessary.See Cooling System on page 9-12for instructions on “How to AddCoolant to the Coolant Reservoir.”

{ CAUTION

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycol,and it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

When replacing the pressure cap,make sure it is hand-tight andfully seated.

Pressure CapNotice: If the pressure cap is nottightly installed, coolant lossand possible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap isproperly and tightly secured.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 9-6 for more informationon location.

Engine OverheatingThere is an engine coolanttemperature warning light on yourvehicle’s instrument panel. SeeEngine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light on page 4-18 formore information.

If Steam Is Coming FromYour Engine

{ CAUTION

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Just turn itoff and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down.Wait until there is no sign ofsteam or coolant before you openthe hood.

If you keep driving when yourengine is overheated, the liquids init can catch fire. You or otherscould be badly burned. Stop yourengine if it overheats, and get outof the vehicle until the engineis cool.


Notice: If the engine catches firebecause of being driven withno coolant, your vehicle can bebadly damaged. The costlyrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

If No Steam Is Coming FromYour EngineAn engine coolant temperaturewarning can indicate a seriousproblem. See Engine CoolantTemperature Warning Light onpage 4-18.

If you get an engine coolanttemperature warning, but see or hearno steam, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the enginecan get a little too hot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

If you get the engine coolanttemperature warning with no sign ofsteam, try this for a minute or so:

1. If your air conditioner is on,turn it off.

2. In heavy traffic, let the engineidle in N (Neutral) whilestopped. If it is safe to do so,pull off the road, shift to P (Park)or N (Neutral) and let theengine idle.

3. Turn on your heater to full hot atthe highest fan speed and openthe windows as necessary.

If you no longer have the overheatwarning, you can drive. Just tobe safe, drive slower for about10 minutes. If the warning does notcome back on, you can drivenormally.

If the warning continues and youhave not stopped, pull over,stop, and park your vehicleright away.

If there is still no sign of steam,you can idle the engine forthree minutes while you are parked.If you still have the warning, turnoff the engine and get everyone outof the vehicle until it cools down.

You may decide not to lift the hoodbut to get service help right away.


Power Steering FluidWhen to Check PowerSteering FluidIt is not necessary to check thepower steering fluid level. A powersteering fluid leak is the onlyreason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take your vehicle to thedealer/retailer service departmentand have it repaired as soonas possible.

Windshield Washer FluidWhat to UseWhen you need windshieldwasher fluid, be sure to read themanufacturer’s instructions beforeuse. If you will be operatingyour vehicle in an area wherethe temperature may fall belowfreezing, use a fluid that hassufficient protection against freezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluiduntil the tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 9-6for reservoir location.

Notice:

• When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer’s instructionsfor adding water.

• Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage yourwasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean aswell as washer fluid.

• Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it isvery cold. This allows for fluidexpansion if freezing occurs,which could damage the tankif it is completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in your windshieldwasher. It can damage thevehicle’s windshield washersystem and paint.


Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementFront Windshield WiperWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear or cracking.

See Maintenance ReplacementParts on page 11-14 for the propertype and length.

Raise the wiper arm, tilt the wiperblade at a 90° angle to thewiper arm, and remove to the side.

1. Turn the ignition off.

2. With the key in the ignition andkey in the LOCK/OFF position,press the wiper lever down.Release the wiper lever when thewipers are in the vertical position.

3. Raise the wiper arm away fromthe windshield.

4. Turn the wiper blade at a90° angle to the wiper arm andremove the blade to the side.

5. Install the new wiper blade.

6. Lower the wiper arm on to thewindshield.

Rear Windshield Wiper

1. Lift the wiper arm straight up.

2. Push the wiper blade straight outof the wiper arm to remove.

3. Install the new wiper blade.


BrakesBrake Fluid

The brake master cylinder and, onmanual transmission vehicles,the clutch hydraulic system use thesame reservoir. The reservoir isfilled with DOT-4 brake fluid.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 9-6 for the location ofthe reservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoirmight go down:

• The brake fluid level goes downbecause of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

• A fluid leak in the brake and/orclutch hydraulic system can alsocause a low fluid level. Have thebrake and/or clutch hydraulicsystem fixed, since a leak meansthat sooner or later the brakesand/or clutch will not work well.

Do not top off the brake/clutch fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the brakelinings are worn, there will be toomuch fluid when new brake liningsare installed. Add or remove fluid, asnecessary, only when work is doneon the brake/clutch hydraulic system.

{ CAUTION

If too much brake fluid is added,it can spill on the engine andburn, if the engine is hot enough.You or others could be burned,

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

and the vehicle could bedamaged. Add brake fluid onlywhen work is done on the brakeand/or clutch hydraulic system.

Refer to Scheduled Maintenance onpage 11-3 to determine when tocheck the brake fluid.

Checking Brake FluidThe brake fluid can be checkedwithout taking off the cap by lookingat the brake fluid reservoir.

The fluid level should be aboveMIN. If it is not, have your brakehydraulic system checked to see ifthere is a leak. After work isdone on the brake hydraulic system,make sure the level is above theMIN but not over the MAX mark.


What to Add

Use only new DOT-4 brake fluidfrom a sealed container. It isrecommended that the brakehydraulic system be flushed andrefilled with new DOT-4 fluidat a regular maintenance serviceevery two years. See AdditionalRequired Services on page 11-6and Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it.This helps keep dirt from enteringthe reservoir.

{ CAUTION

With the wrong kind of fluid inthe brake hydraulic system,the brakes might not work well.This could cause a crash.Always use the proper brake fluid.

Notice:

• Using the wrong fluid can badlydamage brake hydraulic systemparts. For example, just a fewdrops of mineral-based oil,such as engine oil, in the brakehydraulic system can damagebrake hydraulic system parts sobadly that they will have to bereplaced. Do not let someoneput in the wrong kind of fluid.

• If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle’s painted surfaces, thepaint finish can be damaged.Be careful not to spill brakefluid on the vehicle. If you do,wash it off immediately. SeeExterior Cleaning on page 9-76.

Brake WearThis vehicle has disc brakes.

Notice: Continuing to drivewith worn-out brake pads couldresult in costly brake repair.

Front disc brake pads have built-inbrake pad wear indicators thatmake a high-pitched warning soundwhen the brake pads are wornand new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time the vehicle ismoving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ CAUTION

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toan accident. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.


Rear disc brake pads do not havebuilt-in brake pad wear indicators.Periodic visual inspection of the rearbrake pads is required to determinewhen to replace the pads. Visuallyinspect the rear brake padswhenever the rear wheels areremoved such as during tire rotation.

1. Set the parking brake and makesure that the brakes have beengiven enough time to cool.

2. Remove the rear wheels.

3. Visually inspect the rear brakeinner pads (C) at each rearwheel through the inspectionwindow in the brake caliper (A).

Brake pads should be replacedwhen the inner pad (C) isworn to 5/64 in (2 mm) of padthickness (B). New brake pads,with no wear, are 25/64 ofan inch (10 mm) thick.

4. After brake pad inspection orreplacement, install the rearwheels.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal whenthe brakes are first applied orlightly applied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel bolts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wearand evenly tighten wheel bolts inthe proper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacitiesand Specifications on page 10-2.

Brake linings should alwaysbe replaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer/retailer if the brakepedal does not return to normalheight, or if there is a rapid increasein pedal travel. This could be asign that brake service mightbe required.

Brake AdjustmentEvery brake stop, the disc brakesadjust for wear.


Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicleis complex. Its many parts have tobe of top quality and work welltogether if the vehicle is to havereally good braking. The vehicle wasdesigned and tested with top-qualitybrake parts. When parts of thebraking system are replaced — forexample, when the brake liningswear down and new ones areinstalled — be sure to get newapproved replacement parts. If thisis not done, the brakes might notwork properly. For example,if someone puts in brake liningsthat are wrong for the vehicle, thebalance between the front andrear brakes can change — for theworse. The braking performanceexpected can change in many otherways if the wrong replacementbrake parts are installed.

BatteryThis vehicle has a maintenance freebattery. When it is time for a newbattery, see your dealer/retailerfor one that has the replacementnumber shown on the originalbattery’s label. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 9-6for battery location.

Warning: Battery posts, terminals,and related accessories containlead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer andreproductive harm. Wash handsafter handling.

Vehicle Storage

{ CAUTION

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Startingon page 9-69 for tips onworking around a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: If the vehicle isdriven infrequently, remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery. This helps keep the batteryfrom running down.

Extended Storage: For extendedstorage of the vehicle, removethe black, negative (−) cable fromthe battery or use a batterytrickle charger. This helps maintainthe charge of the battery overan extended period of time.


Headlamp AimingThe optical headlamp aiming systemhas been preset at the factory andshould need no further adjustment.

However, If the vehicle is damagedin a crash, the headlamp aim may beaffected and adjustment may benecessary.

If oncoming vehicles flash their highbeams at you, this may also meanthe vertical aim needs to be adjusted.

It is recommended that the vehicleis taken to your dealer/retailer forservice if the headlamps need to bere-aimed. It is possible however,to re-aim the headlamps asdescribed.

The vehicle should:• Be placed so the headlamps

are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from a lightcolored wall.

• Have all four tires on a perfectlylevel surface which is level allthe way to the wall.

• Be placed so it is perpendicularto the wall.

• Not have any snow, ice, ormud on it.

• Be fully assembled and all otherwork stopped while headlampaiming is being done.

• Have a full tank of fuel andone person or 160 lbs (75 kg)on the driver seat.

• Have all tires properly inflated.

Headlamp aiming is done withthe vehicle’s low-beam headlamps.The high-beam headlamps willbe correctly aimed if the low-beamheadlamps are aimed properly.

To adjust the vertical aim on theheadlamps:

1. Open the hood. See HoodRelease on page 9-5 formore information.

2. Locate the aim dot on the lens ofthe low-beam headlamp.

3. Record the distance from theground to the aim dot on thelow-beam headlamp.


4. At a wall, measure from theground upward (A) to therecorded distance from Step 3and mark it.

5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B)on the wall the width of thevehicle at the height of the markin Step 4.

Notice: Do not cover a headlampto improve beam cut-off whenaiming. Covering a headlamp maycause excessive heat build-upwhich may cause damage to theheadlamp.

6. Turn on the low-beam headlampsand place a piece of cardboardor equivalent in front of theheadlamp not being adjusted.Do not place it directly onthe headlamp. This allows onlythe beam of light from theheadlamp being adjusted to beseen on the flat surface.

7. Locate the vertical headlampaiming screws, which areunder the hood near eachheadlamp assembly.The adjustment screw can beturned with a 6 mm socketwrench.

8. Turn the vertical aiming screwuntil the headlamp beam isaimed to the horizontaltape line. Turn it clockwise orcounterclockwise to raiseor lower the angle of the beam.


9. Make sure that the light fromthe headlamp is positionedat the bottom edge of thehorizontal tape line. The lampon the left (A) shows the correctheadlamp aim. The lamp on theright (B) shows the incorrectheadlamp aim.

10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 forthe opposite headlamp.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbson page 9-34.

For any bulb changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer/retailer.

Halogen Bulbs

{ CAUTION

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.

Front Turn Signal Lamps

1. The bulbs of the turn signal lampare replaced through openings inthe front wheel wells. Turn thewheel to gain access to the pushtabs and remove the cover.


2. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and pullstraight out.

3. Turn bulb counterclockwiseand remove.

4. Install new bulb.

5. Reverse Steps 2 through 4 toreinstall.

Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL)1. Open the liftgate. See “Liftgate”

for more information.

2. Remove the two pins in thetailgate trim.

3. Remove the tailgate trim.


4. Unlock the six CenterHigh-Mounted Stoplamp(CHMSL) clips. 5. Remove the CHMSL from the

top of the tailgate.

6. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 toreinstall the lamp assembly.

Taillamps(Five-Door Hatchback)

A. Backup LampB. TaillampC. Taillamp/Stoplamp/Turn

Signal Lamp


To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Open the liftgate.

2. To replace the bulbs on thedriver side, turn both locksand remove the cover.

To replace the bulbs on thepassenger side, turn thelock clockwise and removethe cover.

3. Detach the plug connector fromthe bulb assembly.

4. Turn the nuts counterclockwiseand hold the outside of taillampassembly.

5. Pull the taillamp assemblystraight out.

6. Remove the three nuts.

7. Press on the tabs on the outsideof bulb assembly and remove thebulb assembly.

8. Remove the bulb from the bulbassembly.

9. Install a new bulb withouttouching the glass.

10. Reinstall the bulb assembly intaillamp assembly.

11. Make sure the seals are appliedto the taillamp assembly andscrews.

12. Insert the taillamp assemblyinto the body.

13. Reinstall the three nuts.

14. Attach the plug connector to thebulb assembly.


Taillamps(Three-Door Hatchback)

A. Backup LampB. TaillampC. Taillamp/Stoplamp/Turn

Signal Lamp

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate onpage 2-6 for more information.

2. Detach the plug connector fromthe bulb assembly.

3. Turn the nuts counterclockwiseand hold the outside of taillampassembly.

4. Pull the taillamp assemblystraight out.

5. Remove the seal.6. Press on the tabs on outside of

bulb assembly and remove thebulb assembly.

7. Remove the bulb from the bulbassembly.

8. Install a new bulb withouttouching the glass.

9. Reinstall the bulb assembly intaillamp assembly.

10. Make sure the seals are appliedto the taillamp assembly andscrews.

11. Insert the taillamp assemblyinto the body.

12. Reinstall the three nuts.13. Attach the plug connector to the

bulb assembly.


License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs:

1. Push tab in and pull down on it toremove the license plate lamp.

2. Turn and pull the license platelamp toward you through theopening.

3. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and pull thebulb straight out of the socket.

4. Install the new bulb.

5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 toreinstall the license plate lamp.


Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamp BulbNumber

Front TurnSignal Lamp 3157 NAK

LicensePlate Lamp W5W

Parking Lamp 4157KTaillamp W21

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer/retailer.

Electrical System

Add-On ElectricalEquipmentNotice: Do not add anythingelectrical to the vehicle unless youcheck with your dealer/retailerfirst. Some electrical equipmentcan damage the vehicle and thedamage would not be covered bythe vehicle’s warranty. Someadd-on electrical equipment cankeep other components fromworking as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle battery, even if the vehicle isnot operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 1-35.

Headlamp WiringThe headlamp wiring is protectedby fuses in the fuse block.An electrical overload will cause thelamps to turn off. If this happens,have the headlamp wiring checkedright away.


FusesThe wiring circuits in the vehicleare protected from short circuits byfuses. This greatly reduces thechance of damage caused byelectrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored bandinside the fuse. If the band isbroken or melted, replace the fuse.Be sure to replace a bad fusewith a new one of the identical sizeand rating.

There are two fuse blocks in thevehicle: one in the enginecompartment and one in the trunk.

There is a fuse puller located onthe rear compartment fuse block.See Rear Compartment Fuse Blockon page 9-37. It can be used toeasily remove fuses from thefuse block.

Engine CompartmentFuse BlockThe engine compartment fuse blockis located in the front left sideof the engine compartment.See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 9-6.

To open the fuse block cover,insert a tool into the latch and turn.Pull up on the cover to remove.

Notice: Spilling liquid onany electrical components onthe vehicle may damage it.Always keep the covers onany electrical component.


Fuses Usage

1 Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) Valves

2 ABS Pump

Fuses Usage

4 Climate ControlSystem (Ignition)

5 Engine Cooling Fan(AT and AC only)

Fuses Usage

6 Engine Cooling Fan

7 Windshield & LiftgateGlass Washer Motor


Fuses Usage

8 Horn

10 Door Locks

13 Foglamps

14 Windshield Wipers(high speed)

15 Windshield Wipers(low speed)

16 Antilock Brake System,Brake Lamp Switch

17 Vacuum Pump

18 Starter

20 Air Conditioning Clutch

21Engine ControlModule (ECM)(Main Relay)

22 ECM (Battery)

24 Fuel Pump/Injectors

26 ECM (Sensor andActuators)

Fuses Usage

27 Power Steering

28 AutomaticTransmission (Battery)

29 AutomaticTransmission (Ignition)

30 ECM (Ignition)

32 Brake Switch

34 Steering ColumnModule

35 Radio

36OnStar™ Module/OnStar™ InterfaceModule/Display

Rear CompartmentFuse BlockTo open the liftgate, See Liftgate onpage 2-6.

The rear compartment fuse blockis located on the left side ofthe cargo area behind a cover.

Use the fuse puller, to remove andreplace fuses.


Fuses Usage

1 Front Power Window

3 Cluster

Fuses Usage

4 Climate ControlSystem (Battery)

11 Rear Defogger

Fuses Usage

12 Rear Windshield Wiper

14 Climate ControlSystem (Ignition)


Fuses Usage

16 Front Passenger SeatDetection Sensor

17

Tire PressureMonitoringSystem (TPMS)/RainSensor/InsideRearview Mirror

18 Interior Lights

21 Outside Mirror Heating

22 Sunroof

23 Rear Power Window

24 Diagnostic LinkConnector

29 Accessory PowerOutlet (APO)

34 Sunroof

38 Door Locks

39 Seat Heating Driver

40 Seat Heating FrontPassenger


TiresYour new vehicle comes withhigh-quality tires made bya leading tire manufacturer.If you ever have questions aboutthe tire warranty and where toobtain service, see the “LimitedWarranty, Maintenance andOwner Assistance Information”manual for details. For additionalinformation refer to the tiremanufacturer.

{ CAUTION

• Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

• Overloading your tires cancause overheating as aresult of too much flexing.You could have an air-outand a serious accident.See Loading the Vehicleon page 8-30.

• Underinflated tires posethe same danger asoverloaded tires.The resulting accidentcould cause serious injury.Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressureshould be checked whenyour tires are cold. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure onpage 9-47.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

• Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a suddenimpact — such as whenyou hit a pothole. Keeptires at the recommendedpressure.

• Worn, old tires can causeaccidents. If your tread isbadly worn, or if your tireshave been damaged,replace them.

See High-Speed Operationon page 9-48 for inflationpressure adjustment for highspeed driving.


Low-Profile Tires

If the vehicle has 225/40ZR18 or215/45R18 size tires, theyare classified as low-profileperformance tires. These tiresare designed for very responsivedriving on wet or dry pavement.You may also notice moreroad noise with low-profileperformance tires and that theytend to wear faster.

Notice: If the vehicle haslow-profile tires, they are moresusceptible to damage fromroad hazards or curb impactthan standard profile tires.Tire and/or wheel assemblydamage can occur whencoming into contact with roadhazards like, potholes, orsharp edged objects, or whensliding into a curb. The vehiclewarranty does not cover thistype of damage. Keep tiresset to the correct inflation

pressure and, when possibleavoid contact with curbs,potholes, and other roadhazards.

Winter TiresIf the vehicle has 225/40ZR18 or215/45R18 size tires, they areclassified as low-profile performancetires. These tires are designed forvery responsive driving on wet or drypavement. If you expect to driveon snow or ice covered roads often,you may want to get winter tiresfor your vehicle. All season tiresprovide good overall performance onmost surfaces but they may notoffer the traction you would like orthe same level of performanceas winter tires on snow or icecovered roads.

Winter tires, in general, aredesigned for increased tractionon snow and ice covered roads.

With winter tires, there may bedecreased dry road traction,increased road noise, and shortertire tread life. After switching towinter tires, be alert for changes invehicle handling and braking.

See your dealer/retailer for detailsregarding winter tire availabilityand proper tire selection. Also, seeBuying New Tires on page 9-54.

If you choose to use winter tires:

• Use tires of the same brand andtread type on all four wheelpositions.

• Use only radial ply tires of thesame size, load range, andspeed rating as your originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipment tiresmay not be available for H, V, W,Y and ZR speed rated tires.If you choose winter tires with alower speed rating, never exceedthe tire’s maximum speed capability.


Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tireis molded into its sidewall.The examples below show atypical passenger vehicle tire anda compact spare tire sidewall.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size isa combination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire’s width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description.

See the “Tire Size” illustrationlater in this section for moredetail.

(B) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM’s specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meetor exceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(C) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates thatthe tire is in compliance withthe U.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code is theTire Identification Number (TIN).

The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, anddate the tire was manufactured.The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although onlyone side may have the dateof manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies in thesidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For more informationsee Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 9-57.

(G) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried andthe maximum pressure neededto support that load.

Passenger (P-Metric) TireExample


(A) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies in thesidewall and under the tread.

(B) Temporary Use Only:The compact spare tire ortemporary use tire has a treadlife of approximately 3,000 miles(5 000 km) and should not bedriven at speeds over 50 mph(80 km/h). The compact sparetire is for emergency use when aregular road tire has lost airand gone flat. If your vehiclehas a compact spare tire.

See Compact Spare Tire onpage 9-68 and If a TireGoes Flat on page 9-60.

(C) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code isthe Tire Identification Number(TIN). The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried andthe maximum pressure neededto support that load.

(E) Tire Inflation: The temporaryuse tire or compact spare tireshould be inflated to 60 psi(420 kPa). For more informationon tire pressure and inflationsee Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 9-47.

(F) Tire Size : A combination ofletters and numbers define atire’s width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and servicedescription. The letter T asthe first character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporaryuse only.

(G) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM’s specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meetor exceed all federal safetyguidelines.

Compact Spare Tire Example


Tire Size

The following illustration showsan example of a typicalpassenger vehicle tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:The United States version ofa metric tire sizing system.The letter P as the firstcharacter in the tire sizemeans a passenger vehicle tireengineered to standards setby the U.S. Tire and RimAssociation.(B) Tire Width: The three-digitnumber indicates the tiresection width in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.

For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 60, as shown initem C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire’s sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: A lettercode is used to indicate thetype of ply construction in thetire. The letter R means radialply construction; the letter Dmeans diagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter Bmeans belted-bias plyconstruction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(F) Service Description:These characters represent theload index and speed ratingof the tire. The load indexrepresents the load carrycapacity a tire is certified tocarry. The speed rating is themaximum speed a tire is certifiedto carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inchof the tire. Air pressure isexpressed in pounds per squareinch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This meansthe combined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examplesof optional accessories are,automatic transmission, powersteering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire’s height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords that is located between theplies and the tread. Cords maybe made from steel or otherreinforcing materials.


Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerlineof the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in atire, measured in poundsper square inch (psi) orkilopascals (kPa) before a tirehas built up heat from driving.See Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 9-47.

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standardand optional equipment includingthe maximum capacity of fuel,oil, and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) motor vehicle safetystandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, and dateof production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Loading the Vehicleon page 8-30.

GAWR FRT: Gross AxleWeight Rating for the front axle.See Loading the Vehicle onpage 8-30.

GAWR RR: Gross AxleWeight Rating for the rear axle.See Loading the Vehicle onpage 8-30.

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tire,that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire:A tire used on light dutytrucks and some multipurposepassenger vehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressureto which a cold tire can beinflated. The maximum airpressure is molded onto thesidewall.

Maximum Load Rating:The load rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.


Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight:The number of occupantsa vehicle is designed to seatmultiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg).See Loading the Vehicleon page 8-30.

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tirethat has a particular side thatfaces outward when mounted ona vehicle. The side of the tirethat contains a whitewall,bears white lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding thatis higher or deeper than thesame moldings on theother sidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:A tire used on passengercars and some light duty trucksand multipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommendedtire inflation pressure asshown on the tire placard.See Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 9-47 and Loading theVehicle on page 8-30.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cordsthat extend to the beads are laidat 90 degrees to the centerlineof the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumericcode assigned to a tireindicating the maximum speedat which a tire can operate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes calledwear bars, that show acrossthe tread of a tire when only1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of treadremains. See When It Is Timefor New Tires on page 9-54.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards): A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for atire’s traction, temperature,and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturersusing government testingprocedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of thetire. See Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 9-57.


Vehicle Capacity Weight:The number of designatedseating positions multiplied by150 lbs (68 kg) plus therated cargo load. See Loadingthe Vehicle on page 8-30.

Vehicle Maximum Load onthe Tire: Load on an individualtire due to curb weight,accessory weight, occupantweight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehicle’scapacity weight and theoriginal equipment tire sizeand recommended inflationpressure. See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” underLoading the Vehicle onpage 8-30.

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operate effectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tellyou that under-inflation orover-inflation is all right. It isnot. If your tires do not haveenough air (under-inflation),you can get the following:• Too much flexing• Too much heat• Tire overloading• Premature or irregular wear• Poor handling• Reduced fuel economyIf your tires have too much air(over-inflation), you can getthe following:• Unusual wear• Poor handling• Rough ride• Needless damage from

road hazards

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to your vehicle.This label shows your vehicle’soriginal equipment tires andthe correct inflation pressures foryour tires when they are cold.The recommended cold tireinflation pressure, shown on thelabel, is the minimum amountof air pressure needed tosupport your vehicle’s maximumload carrying capacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weight yourvehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see Loadingthe Vehicle on page 8-30.How you load your vehicleaffects vehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load yourvehicle with more weight than itwas designed to carry.


When to Check

Check your tires once a monthor more. Do not forget tocheck the compact spare tire,it should be at 60 psi (420 kPa).For additional informationregarding the compact sparetire, see Compact Spare Tireon page 9-68.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegage to check tire pressure.You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply bylooking at them. Radial tiresmay look properly inflated evenwhen they are under-inflated.Check the tire’s inflationpressure when the tires arecold. Cold means your vehiclehas been sitting for at leastthree hours or driven no morethan 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap fromthe tire valve stem. Press the tiregage firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until you reach therecommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release airby pushing on the metal stemin the center of the tire valve.Re-check the tire pressure withthe tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve capsback on the valve stems.They help prevent leaks bykeeping out dirt and moisture.

High-Speed Operation

{ CAUTION

Driving at high speeds, 100 mph(160 km/h) or higher, puts anadditional strain on tires.Sustained high-speed drivingcauses excessive heat build upand can cause sudden tire failure.You could have a crash andyou or others could be killed.Some high-speed rated tiresrequire inflation pressureadjustment for high speedoperation. When speed limits androad conditions are such that avehicle can be driven at highspeeds, make sure the tires arerated for high speed operation, inexcellent condition, and set to thecorrect cold tire inflation pressurefor the vehicle load.


If the vehicle has P205/55R16 sizetires, additional air pressure isrequired when driving the vehicle atspeeds of 99 mph (158 km/h) orhigher. Set the cold tire inflationpressure to the maximum inflationpressure shown on the tire sidewall,or 32 psi (220 kPa), whichever islower. See the example following.

Example:

The maximum load and inflationpressure is molded on the tire’ssidewall, in small letters, near the rimflange. It reads something like this:Maximum load 710 kg (1565 lbs)350 kPa (51 psi) Max. Press.

For this example, the cold tireinflation pressure for high-speeddriving should be set at 32 psi(220 kPa).

When high-speed driving ends,return the tire pressure to therecommended cold inflationpressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label.

See Loading the Vehicle onpage 8-30. Tire pressure should bechecked and correctly set whenthe tires are cold. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 9-47.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your vehicle’s tiresand transmit tire pressure readings toa receiver located in the vehicle.Each tire, including the spare(if provided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer onthe vehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehiclehas tires of a different size than thesize indicated on the vehicleplacard or tire inflation pressurelabel, you should determine theproper tire inflation pressurefor those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped witha tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a lowtire pressure telltale when one ormore of your tires is significantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency andtire tread life, and may affect thevehicle’s handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS isnot a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflationhas not reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.


Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicatoris combined with the low tirepressure telltale. When the systemdetects a malfunction, the telltalewill flash for approximatelyone minute and then remaincontinuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-upsas long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicatoris illuminated, the system may notbe able to detect or signal lowtire pressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tiresor wheels on the vehicle thatprevent the TPMS from functioningproperly. Always check the TPMSmalfunction telltale after replacing

one or more tires or wheels onyour vehicle to ensure thatthe replacement or alternate tiresand wheels allow the TPMS tocontinue to function properly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 9-51 foradditional information.

Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) andIndustry and Science CanadaThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) operates on a radiofrequency and complies withPart 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:1. This device may not cause

harmful interference.

2. This device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation.

The TPMS operates on a radiofrequency and complies withRSS-210 of Industry and ScienceCanada. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:


2. This device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of the device.



Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warnthe driver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensorsare mounted onto each tire andwheel assembly, excluding thespare tire. The TPMS sensorsmonitor the air pressure in thevehicle’s tires and transmit tirepressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warninglight located in the instrumentpanel cluster.

The low tire pressure warning lightcomes on at each ignition cycleuntil the tires are inflated tothe correct inflation pressure.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weatherwhen the vehicle is first started, andthen turn off as you start to drive.This could be an early indicator thatthe air pressure in the tire(s) aregetting low and need to be inflatedto the proper pressure.

You must begin driving before theTPMS system is operational.TPMS sensors need to be installedonto the full-size tire and wheelassemblies, and the tires adjustedto the manufacturers’ recommendedtire pressure amount.

A Tire and Load Information label isattached to the vehicle, andshows the size of the vehicle’soriginal equipment tires andthe correct inflation pressure for thetires when they are cold. SeeLoading the Vehicle on page 8-30,for an example of the Tire and

Load Information label and itslocation on the vehicle. Also seeInflation - Tire Pressure onpage 9-47.

The vehicle’s TPMS can warn youabout a low tire pressure conditionbut it does not replace normaltire maintenance. See TireInspection and Rotation onpage 9-52 and Tires on page 9-40.

Notice: Liquid tire sealantscould damage the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS) sensors.Sensor damage caused byusing a tire sealant is not coveredby your warranty. Do not useliquid tire sealants.

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. Any timeyou replace one or more of theTPMS sensors or rotate thevehicle’s tires, the identificationcodes are automatically learned bythe TPMS. This occurs within afew moments of driving the vehicleover 19 mph (31 km/h).


TPMS Malfunction LightThe TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMSsensors are missing or inoperable.When the system detects amalfunction, the low tire warninglight flashes for about one minuteand then stays on for the remainderof the ignition cycle. Some of theconditions that can cause themalfunction light to come on are:

• One of the road tires has beenreplaced with the spare tire. Thespare tire does not have a TPMSsensor. The TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message should gooff once you re-install the road tirecontaining the TPMS sensor.

• One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. The TPMSmalfunction light should go offafter the TPMS sensors areinstalled and the vehicle isdriven for a few moments over19 mph (31 km/h). See yourdealer/retailer for service.

• Replacement tires or wheels donot match the vehicle’s originalequipment tires or wheels. Tiresand wheels other than thoserecommended for the vehiclecould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 9-54.

• Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioning itcannot detect or signal a low tirecondition. See your dealer/retailer forservice if the TPMS malfunction lightcomes on and stays on.

Tire Inspection andRotationInspect tires regularly for signs ofwear or damage. Also inspect thespare tire. For more informationon tire inspection, see When It IsTime for New Tires on page 9-54.

Rotating vehicle tires helps themto wear evenly and keeps thevehicle performing like itdid when tires were new.

Rotate the tires and checkwheel alignment approximatelyevery 5,000 to 8,000 miles(8 000 to 13 000 km) or whenunusual tire wear is noted.See “Scheduled Maintenance”in the Index of the “LimitedWarranty, Maintenanceand Owner AssistanceInformation” manual for moreinformation. Also check thewheels for damage, see WheelReplacement on page 9-59for more information.


Use this pattern when rotatingthe vehicle tires. Do not includethe compact spare tire in thetire rotation.

{ CAUTION

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or onthe parts to which it isfastened, can make wheelbolts become loose after time.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

The wheel could come off andcause a crash. When youchange a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places wherethe wheel attaches to thevehicle using a scraper orwire brush.

Installing wheels with a goodmetal-to-metal contact atthe mounting surfaces isnecessary to prevent wheelbolts from becoming loose.

To prevent corrosion orrust build-up, lightly coat thewheel hub center and thecone-shaped surface of eachwheel bolt with wheel bearinggrease, after a wheel change.

See Changing a Flat Tire onpage 9-61 for informationon installing the tire and wheelassembly. Also see “WheelBolt Torque” under Capacitiesand Specifications on page 10-2.

Adjust the front and reartires to the recommendedcold tire inflation pressureshown on the Tire andLoading Information label.See Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 9-47 and Loading theVehicle on page 8-30.


When It Is Time forNew TiresVarious factors, such asmaintenance, temperatures, drivingspeeds, vehicle loading, androad conditions influence when youneed new tires.

One way to tell when it is time fornew tires is to check the treadwearindicators, which will appearwhen the tires have only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining.

You need new tires if any of thefollowing statements are true:

• You can see the indicators atthree or more places aroundthe tire.

• You can see cord or fabricshowing through the tire’s rubber.

• The tread or sidewall is cracked,cut, or snagged deep enough toshow cord or fabric.

• The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

• The tire has a puncture, cut, orother damage that cannot berepaired well because of the sizeor location of the damage.

The rubber in tires degrades overtime, even if they are not beingused. This is also true for the sparetire, if the vehicle has one. Multipleconditions affect how fast thisaging takes place, includingtemperatures, loading conditions,and inflation pressure maintenance.

With proper care and maintenancetires typically wear out beforethey degrade due to age. If you areunsure about the need to replacethe tires as they get older, consultthe tire manufacturer for moreinformation.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for your vehicle.The original equipment tires installedon your vehicle, when it was new,were designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec) systemrating. If you need replacement tires,GM strongly recommends thatyou get tires with the same TPCSpec rating. This way, your vehiclewill continue to have tires thatare designed to give the sameperformance and vehicle safety,during normal use, as theoriginal tires.


GM’s exclusive TPC Spec systemconsiders over a dozen criticalspecifications that impact the overallperformance of your vehicle,including brake system performance,ride and handling, traction control,and tire pressure monitoringperformance. GM’s TPC Specnumber is molded onto the tire’ssidewall near the tire size. If the tireshave an all-season tread design,the TPC Spec number will befollowed by an MS for mud andsnow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling onpage 9-42 for additional information.

GM recommends replacing tiresin sets of four. This is becauseuniform tread depth on all tires willhelp keep your vehicle performingmost like it did when the tireswere new. Replacing less than afull set of tires can affect the brakingand handling performance of yourvehicle. See Tire Inspectionand Rotation on page 9-52 forinformation on proper tire rotation.

{ CAUTION

Mixing tires could cause youto lose control while driving.If you mix tires of differentsizes, brands, or types(radial and bias-belted tires),the vehicle may not handleproperly, and you could havea crash. Using tires of differentsizes, brands, or types mayalso cause damage to thevehicle. Be sure to use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels. It is allright to drive with the compactspare temporarily, as it wasdeveloped for use on thevehicle. See Compact SpareTire on page 9-68.

{ CAUTION

If you use bias-ply tires onthe vehicle, the wheel rimflanges could develop cracksafter many miles of driving.A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly, causing a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If you must replace your vehicle’stires with those that do not havea TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size,load range, speed rating, andconstruction type (radial andbias-belted tires) as your vehicle’soriginal tires.


Vehicles that have a tire pressuremonitoring system could givean inaccurate low-pressure warningif non-TPC Spec rated tires areinstalled on your vehicle. Non-TPCSpec rated tires may give alow-pressure warning that is higheror lower than the proper warninglevel you would get with TPC Specrated tires. See Tire PressureMonitor System on page 9-49.

Your vehicle’s original equipmenttires are listed on the Tire andLoading Information Label. SeeLoading the Vehicle on page 8-30,for more information about theTire and Loading Information Labeland its location on your vehicle.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are adifferent size than your originalequipment wheels and tires,this may affect the way your vehicleperforms, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollover.Additionally, if your vehicle haselectronic systems such as, anti-lockbrakes, traction control, andstability control, the performance ofthese systems can be affected.

{ CAUTION

If you add different sizedwheels, your vehicle may notprovide an acceptable level ofperformance and safety if tires notrecommended for those wheelsare selected. You may increasethe chance that you will crash andsuffer serious injury. Only useSaturn specific wheel and tiresystems developed for yourvehicle, and have them properlyinstalled by a Saturn certifiedtechnician.

See Buying New Tires on page 9-54and Accessories and Modificationson page 9-3 for additionalinformation.


Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on thetire sidewall between treadshoulder and maximum sectionwidth. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed bythe United States NationalHighway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA),which grades tires by treadwear,traction, and temperatureperformance. This appliesonly to vehicles sold in theUnited States. The grades aremolded on the sidewalls ofmost passenger car tires.The Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG) systemdoes not apply to deep tread,

winter-type snow tires,space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominal rimdiameters of 10 to 12 inches(25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may varywith respect to these grades,they must also conform tofederal safety requirements andadditional General MotorsTire Performance Criteria (TPC)standards.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based onthe wear rate of the tirewhen tested under controlledconditions on a specifiedgovernment test course.

For example, a tire graded 150would wear one and a half (1.5)times as well on the governmentcourse as a tire graded 100.The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actualconditions of their use, however,and may depart significantly fromthe norm due to variations indriving habits, service practices,and differences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highestto lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.Those grades represent thetire’s ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.


Temperature – A, B, C

The temperature grades areA (the highest), B, and C,representing the tire’s resistanceto the generation of heat andits ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can causethe material of the tire todegenerate and reduce tire life,and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds toa level of performance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard No. 109. GradesB and A represent higher levelsof performance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. It should be

noted that the temperature gradefor this tire is established for a tirethat is properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

{WARNING

The temperature grade for thistire is established for a tirethat is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessivespeed, underinflation, orexcessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination,can cause heat buildup andpossible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment andTire BalanceThe tires and wheels on yourvehicle were aligned and balancedcarefully at the factory to giveyou the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancingwill not be necessary on a regularbasis. However, if you noticeunusual tire wear or your vehiclepulling to one side or the other, thealignment might need to bechecked. If you notice your vehiclevibrating when driving on asmooth road, the tires and wheelsmight need to be rebalanced.See your dealer/retailer for properdiagnosis.


Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked or badly rusted or corroded.If the wheel bolts keep comingloose, the wheel and wheel boltsshould be replaced. If the wheelleaks air, replace it (except somealuminum wheels, which cansometimes be repaired). See yourdealer/retailer if any of theseconditions exist.

Your dealer/retailer will know thekind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset and bemounted the same way as theone it replaces.

If you need to replace any of thewheels or wheel bolts, replace themonly with new GM original equipmentparts. This way, you will be sure tohave the right wheel and wheel boltsfor the vehicle.

{ CAUTION

Using the wrong replacementwheels or wheel bolts on yourvehicle can be dangerous. It couldaffect the braking and handling ofthe vehicle, make the tires lose airand make you lose control ofthe vehicle. You could have acollision in which you or otherscould be injured. Always use thecorrect wheel and wheel bolts forreplacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel canalso cause problems with bearinglife, brake cooling, speedometeror odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height,vehicle ground clearance, and tireor tire chain clearance to thebody and chassis.

See Changing a Flat Tire onpage 9-61 for more information.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ CAUTION

Putting a used wheel on thevehicle is dangerous. You cannotknow how it has been used orhow far it has been driven.It could fail suddenly and cause acrash. If you have to replace awheel, use a new GM originalequipment wheel.


Tire Chains

{ CAUTION

Do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,suspension or other vehicle parts.The area damaged by the tirechains could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle and you orothers may be injured in a crash.

Use another type of tractiondevice only if its manufacturerrecommends it for use on thevehicle and tire size combinationand road conditions. Follow thatmanufacturer’s instructions. Tohelp avoid damage to the vehicle,drive slowly, readjust or removethe device if it is contacting thevehicle, and do not spin thevehicle’s wheels. If you do findtraction devices that will fit,install them on the front tires.

Tire ChangingIf a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowoutwhile you are driving, especially ifyou maintain your vehicle’s tiresproperly. If air goes out of a tire, it ismuch more likely to leak out slowly.But if you should ever have ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire createsa drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and gripthe steering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop well out of thetraffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correction youwould use in a skid. In any rearblowout remove your foot from theaccelerator pedal. Get the vehicleunder control by steering theway you want the vehicle to go.

It may be very bumpy and noisy, butyou can still steer. Gently brake to astop, well off the road if possible.

{ CAUTION

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without the appropriatesafety equipment and training. If ajack is provided with the vehicle,it is designed only for changing aflat tire. If it is used for anythingelse, you or others could be badlyinjured or killed if the vehicle slipsoff the jack. If a jack is providedwith the vehicle, only use it forchanging a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, the next partshows how to use the jackingequipment to change a flat tiresafely.


Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 4-4.

{ CAUTION

Changing a tire can be dangerous.The vehicle can slip off the jackand roll over or fall on you or otherpeople. You and they could bebadly injured or even killed.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

Find a level place to changeyour tire. To help prevent thevehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission shift lever inP (Park), or shift a manualtransmission to 1 (First) orR (Reverse).

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

To be certain the vehicle will notmove, put blocks at the front andrear of the tire farthest away fromthe one being changed. Thatwould be the tire on the other side,at the opposite end of the vehicle.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),use the following example as aguide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks (A).

A. Wheel BlockB. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to use the jack and changea tire.


Removing the Spare Tireand ToolsThe equipment you will need islocated in the rear storage area.

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgateon page 2-6.

2. Lift the floor cover to access thespare tire and tools.

3. Remove the foam pad. Turn theretainer counterclockwise toremove it.

4. Remove the spare tire by pullingit up and out of the trunk.

5. The jack and tools are storedbelow the spare tire.

6. The tools you will be usinginclude the jack (A), wheelwrench (B), screwdriver (C),and jack handle (D).


Removing the Flat Tireand Installing theSpare Tire1. If your vehicle has wheel covers,

remove the cover.Do not try to put a wheel coveron your compact spare tire.It will not fit. Store the wheelcover in the trunk until you havethe flat tire repaired or replaced.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fiton your vehicle’s compact spare.If you try to put a wheel cover onthe compact spare, the cover orthe spare could be damaged.

2. If your vehicle has wheel boltcaps, remove the caps. Storethe caps with the wheel cover.

3. Use the wheel wrench to loosenall the wheel bolts. Do notremove them yet.

Notice: Make sure that thejack lift head is in the correctposition or you may damage yourvehicle. The repairs would notbe covered by your warranty.


4. Position the jack lift head at thejack location nearest the flattire. The location is indicated bya mark on the bottom edgeof the vehicle.

5. Put the compact spare tirenear you.

{ CAUTION

Getting under a vehicle when it isjacked up is dangerous. If thevehicle slips off the jack, youcould be badly injured or killed.Never get under a vehicle when itis supported only by a jack.

{ CAUTION

Raising your vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned can damagethe vehicle and even make thevehicle fall. To help avoidpersonal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

6. Raise the vehicle by turning thejack handle clockwise. Raise thevehicle far enough off theground so there is enough roomfor the compact spare tire tofit under the vehicle.

7. Remove all of the wheel bolts.


{ CAUTION

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or onthe parts to which it is fastened,can make wheel bolts becomeloose after time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident.When you change a wheel,remove any rust or dirt fromplaces where the wheel attachesto the vehicle. In an emergency,you can use a cloth or a papertowel to do this; but be sure touse a scraper or wire brush later,if needed, to get all the rust ordirt off. See Changing a Flat Tireon page 9-61.

8. Remove any rust or dirt from thewheel bolts, mounting surfacesand spare wheel.Installing wheels with a goodmetal-to-metal contact atthe mounting surface isnecessary to prevent the wheelbolts from becoming loose.To prevent corrosion or rustbuild-up, apply a light coat ofwheel bearing grease to thewheel hub center and to thecone-shaped surface of eachwheel bolt at every wheel change.

9. Place the compact spare tire onthe wheel-mounting surface.

10. Reinstall the wheel bolts withthe rounded end of the boltstoward the wheel. Tighten eachbolt by hand until the wheelis held against the hub.

11. Lower the vehicle by turning thejack handle counterclockwise.Lower the jack completely.


12. Tighten the wheel bolts firmlyin a crisscross sequence,as shown.

{ CAUTION

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrench

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

to the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 10-2 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.

Notice: Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can lead to brakepulsation and rotor damage.To avoid expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten the wheel nutsin the proper sequence and tothe proper torque specification.See Capacities and Specificationson page 10-2 for the wheel nuttorque specification.

Storing a Flat or SpareTire and Tools

{ CAUTION

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.


To store a flat or spare tire andtools, do the following:

A. JackB. Wheel WrenchC. ScrewdriverD. Jack Handle

1. Replace the jack and toolsas shown.

2. Place the flat tire face down intothe spare tire hub.

3. Turn spare tire hold-down bolt byturning clockwise. Return thefoam pad to its original position.

4. Put the load floor back in place.

The compact spare tire is fortemporary use only. Replace thecompact spare with a full-size tire assoon as possible.


Compact Spare Tire

{ CAUTION

Driving with more than onecompact spare tire at a time couldresult in loss of braking andhandling. This could lead to acrash and you or others could beinjured. Use only one compactspare tire at a time.

Although the compact spare tirewas fully inflated when thevehicle was new, it can lose airafter a time. Check the inflationpressure regularly. It should be60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spareon the vehicle, stop as soonas possible and make sure thespare tire is correctly inflated.The compact spare is made toperform well at speeds up to65 mph (105 km/h) for distances upto 3,000 miles (5 000 km), soyou can finish your trip and havethe full-size tire repaired or replacedat your convenience. Of course, itis best to replace the spare witha full-size tire as soon as possible.The spare tire will last longerand be in good shape in case it isneeded again.

Notice: When the compactspare is installed, do not takethe vehicle through an automaticcar wash with guide rails.The compact spare can getcaught on the rails which candamage the tire, wheel and otherparts of the vehicle.

Do not use the compact spare onother vehicles.

And do not mix the compact sparetire or wheel with other wheelsor tires. They will not fit. Keep thespare tire and its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit thecompact spare. Using them candamage the vehicle and candamage the chains too. Do notuse tire chains on the compactspare.


Jump StartingIf your battery has run down, try touse another vehicle and somejumper cables to start your vehicle.Be sure to use the following stepsto do it safely.

{ CAUTION

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

• They contain acid that canburn you.

• They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

• They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these stepscould result in costly damage tothe vehicle that would not becovered by the warranty.

Trying to start the vehicle bypushing or pulling it will not work,and it could damage the vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle.It must have a 12-volt batterywith a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’ssystem is not a 12-volt systemwith a negative ground, bothvehicles can be damaged. Onlyuse vehicles with 12-volt systemswith negative grounds to jumpstart your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough sothe jumper cables can reach, butbe sure the vehicles are nottouching each other. If theyare, it could cause a groundconnection you do not want.You would not be able to startyour vehicle, and the badgrounding could damage theelectrical systems.To avoid the possibility of thevehicles rolling, set the parkingbrake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump startprocedure. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) ora manual transmission inN (Neutral) before setting theparking brake.


Notice: If you leave the radio orother accessories on duringthe jump starting procedure,they could be damaged. Therepairs would not be covered bythe warranty. Always turn offthe radio and other accessorieswhen jump starting the vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on bothvehicles. Unplug unnecessaryaccessories plugged intothe cigarette lighter or theaccessory power outlet. Turn offthe radio and all lamps thatare not needed. This will avoidsparks and help save bothbatteries. And it could savethe radio!

4. Open the hoods and locate thebatteries. Find the positive (+)and negative (−) terminallocations on each vehicle. Yourvehicle’s positive (+) terminalis identified by “+” sign on batterycase or terminal. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 9-6.

{ CAUTION

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{ CAUTION

Using a match near a battery cancause battery gas to explode.People have been hurt doing this,and some have been blinded. Usea flashlight if you need more light.

Be sure the battery has enoughwater. You do not need to addwater to the battery installed inyour new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it islow, add water to take care of thatfirst. If you don’t, explosive gascould be present.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.


{ CAUTION

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Check that the jumper cablesdo not have loose or missinginsulation. If they do, you couldget a shock. The vehiclescould be damaged too.Before you connect the cables,here are some things you toknow. Positive (+) will goto positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one. Negative (−) will goto the engine lift hook.Do not connect positive (+) tonegative (−) or you will geta short that would damage thebattery and maybe otherparts too. And do not connectthe negative (−) cable to

the negative (−) terminal on thedead battery because thiscan cause sparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+)cable to the positive (+) terminalof the dead battery. Use aremote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touchmetal. Connect it to thepositive (+) terminal of thegood battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one.

8. Now connect the blacknegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal of thegood battery. Use a remotenegative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step.The other end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the deadbattery.

9. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable at least18 inches (45 cm) away fromthe dead battery, but notnear engine parts that move.Connect it to the engine lift hook.You may need to scrape thesurface with your jumper cableto obtain a proper ground.The electrical connection is justas good there, and the chanceof sparks getting back to thebattery is much less.


10. Now start the vehicle with thegood battery and run theengine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, it probablyneeds service.

Notice: If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and removethe jumper cables in the correctorder, making sure that the cablesdo not touch each other orother metal.

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal EnginePart or Remote Negative (–)Terminal

B. Good Battery or RemotePositive (+) and RemoteNegative (–) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or RemotePositive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cablesfrom both vehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−)cable from the vehicle that hadthe dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−)cable from the vehicle with thegood battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the vehicle with thegood battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the other vehicle.

5. Return the caps over thepositive (+) and negative (–)terminals to their originalpositions.

Jumper Cable Removal


Towing

Towing Your VehicleTo avoid damage, the disabledvehicle should be towed with allfour wheels off the ground.Consult your dealer/retailer or aprofessional towing service ifthe disabled vehicle must be towed.See Roadside Assistance Programon page 12-6.

Recreational VehicleTowingNotice: Dolly towing or dinghytowing the vehicle may causedamage because of reducedground clearance. Always put thevehicle on a flatbed truck ortrailer.

The vehicle was neither designednor intended to be towed with anyof its wheels on the ground.

Towing a TrailerThe vehicle is neither designed norintended to tow a trailer.

Appearance Care

Interior CleaningYour vehicle’s interior will continueto look its best if it is cleanedoften. Although not always visible,dust and dirt can accumulateon your upholstery. Dirt can damagecarpet, fabric, leather, and plasticsurfaces. Regular vacuuming isrecommended to remove particlesfrom the upholstery. It is importantto keep your upholstery frombecoming and remaining heavilysoiled. Soils should be removed asquickly as possible. Your vehicle’sinterior may experience extremes ofheat that could cause stains toset rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may requiremore frequent cleaning. Use carebecause newspapers and garmentsthat transfer color to your homefurnishings may also transfer colorto your vehicle’s interior.


When cleaning your vehicle’sinterior, only use cleanersspecifically designed for thesurfaces being cleaned.Permanent damage may resultfrom using cleaners on surfaces forwhich they were not intended.Use glass cleaner only on glass.Remove any accidental over-sprayfrom other surfaces immediately.To prevent over-spray, apply cleanerdirectly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: Using abrasive cleanerswhen cleaning glass surfaceson the vehicle, could scratch theglass and/or cause damage tothe rear window defogger.When cleaning the glass on thevehicle, use only a soft clothand glass cleaner.

Many cleaners contain solventsthat may become concentrated inyour vehicle’s breathing space.

Before using cleaners, read andadhere to all safety instructions onthe label. While cleaning yourvehicle’s interior, maintain adequateventilation by opening yourvehicle’s doors and windows.

Dust may be removed from smallbuttons and knobs using a smallbrush with soft bristles.

Your dealer/retailer has a productfor cleaning your vehicle’s glass.You can also obtain a product fromyour dealer/retailer to removeodors from your vehicle’s upholstery.

Do not clean your vehicle usingthe following cleaners or techniques:

• Never use a knife or any othersharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

• Never use a stiff brush. It cancause damage to your vehicle’sinterior surfaces.

• Never apply heavy pressure orrub aggressively with a cleaningcloth. Use of heavy pressurecan damage the interior and doesnot improve the effectivenessof soil removal.

• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.Avoid laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too muchsoap will leave a residuethat leaves streaks and attractsdirt. For liquid cleaners, about20 drops per gallon (3.78 L)of water is a good guide.

• Do not heavily saturate theupholstery while cleaning.

• Damage to your vehicle’s interiormay result from the use of manyorganic solvents such as naptha,alcohol, etc.


Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a softbrush attachment frequently toremove dust and loose dirt.A canister vacuum with a beater barin the nozzle may only be usedon floor carpet and carpeted floormats. For soils, always try to removethem first with plain water or clubsoda. Before cleaning, gentlyremove as much of the soil aspossible using one of the followingtechniques:

• For liquids: gently blot theremaining soil with a paper towel.Allow the soil to absorb intothe paper towel until no more canbe removed.

• For solid dry soils: remove asmuch as possible and thenvacuum.

To clean, use the followinginstructions:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean whitecloth with water or club soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excessmoisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Continue cleaning, usinga clean area of the cloth eachtime it becomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub the soiledarea until the cleaning clothremains clean.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution and repeat the cleaningprocess that was used withplain water.

If any of the soil remains, acommercial fabric cleaner or spotlifter may be necessary. When acommercial upholstery cleaneror spot lifter is to be used, test asmall hidden area for colorfastnessfirst. If the locally cleaned areagives any impression that a ringformation may result, clean theentire surface.

After the cleaning process has beencompleted, a paper towel can beused to blot excess moisturefrom the fabric or carpet.


LeatherA soft cloth dampened with watercan be used to remove dust.If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a soft cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution canbe used. Allow the leather to drynaturally. Do not use heat todry. Never use steam to cleanleather. Never use spot lifters orspot removers on leather.Many commercial leather cleanersand coatings that are sold topreserve and protect leather maypermanently change the appearanceand feel of your leather and arenot recommended. Do not usesilicone or wax-based products, orthose containing organic solventsto clean your vehicle’s interiorbecause they can alter theappearance by increasing thegloss in a non-uniform manner.Never use shoe polish on leather.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, andOther Plastic SurfacesA soft cloth dampened with watermay be used to remove dust.If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft clothdampened with a mild soap solutioncan be used to gently removedust and dirt. Never use spot liftersor removers on plastic surfaces.Many commercial cleanersand coatings that are sold topreserve and protect soft plasticsurfaces may permanently changethe appearance and feel of yourinterior and are not recommended.Do not use silicone or wax-basedproducts, or those containingorganic solvents to clean yourvehicle’s interior because they canalter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products mayincrease gloss on your instrumentpanel. The increase in gloss maycause annoying reflections inthe windshield and even make itdifficult to see through thewindshield under certain conditions.

Exterior CleaningCleaning ExteriorLamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water,a soft cloth and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps and lenses.Follow instructions under “WashingYour Vehicle” later in this section.

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishingof your vehicle by hand may benecessary to remove residue fromthe paint finish. You can getapproved cleaning products fromyour dealer/retailer.


If your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoatgives more depth and gloss tothe colored basecoat. Always usewaxes and polishes that arenon-abrasive and made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Notice: Machine compoundingor aggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes andpolishes that are made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishon the vehicle.

Foreign materials such as calciumchloride and other salts, icemelting agents, road oil and tar,tree sap, bird droppings, chemicalsfrom industrial chimneys, etc.,can damage your vehicle’s finish ifthey remain on painted surfaces.Wash the vehicle as soon aspossible. If necessary, usenon-abrasive cleaners that aremarked safe for painted surfaces toremove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces aresubject to aging, weather andchemical fallout that can taketheir toll over a period of years.You can help to keep the paint finishlooking new by keeping yourvehicle garaged or coveredwhenever possible.

Protecting Exterior BrightMetal Parts

Bright metal parts should becleaned regularly to keep theirluster. Wash with water oruse chrome polish on chrome orstainless steel trim, if necessary.

Use special care with aluminum trim.To avoid damaging protective trim,never use auto or chrome polish,steam or caustic soap to cleanaluminum. A coating of wax, rubbedto high polish, is recommended forall bright metal parts.

Washing Your VehicleThe best way to preserve yourvehicle’s finish is to keep it clean bywashing it often.

Do not wash the vehicle in directsunlight. Use a car washing soap.

Notice: Certain cleaners containchemicals that can damage theemblems or nameplates on thevehicle. Check the cleaningproduct label. If it states that itshould not be used on plasticparts, do not use it on the vehicleor damage may occur and it wouldnot be covered by the warranty.

Do not use cleaning agents that arepetroleum based or that containacid or abrasives, as they candamage the paint, metal or plasticon your vehicle. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained fromyour dealer/retailer. Follow allmanufacturers’ directions regardingcorrect product usage, necessarysafety precautions and appropriatedisposal of any vehicle care product.


Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches andwater spotting.

High pressure car washes maycause water to enter the vehicle.Avoid using high pressure washescloser than 12 inches (30 cm) tothe surface of the vehicle. Use ofpower washers exceeding 1,200 psi(8 274 kPa) can result in damageor removal of paint and decals.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstripswill make them last longer, sealbetter, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a cleancloth. During very cold, dampweather frequent applicationmay be required.

See “Fluids and Lubricants” in theIndex of the “Maintenance andWarranty and Owner assistanceInformation” manual.

Wheels and Trim — Aluminumor ChromeYour vehicle may have eitheraluminum or chrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using asoft clean cloth with mild soap andwater. Rinse with clean water.After rinsing thoroughly, dry with asoft clean towel. A wax may thenbe applied.

Notice: Chrome wheels andother chrome trim may bedamaged if the vehicle is notwashed after driving on roadsthat have been sprayed withmagnesium, calcium or sodiumchloride. These chlorides areused on roads for conditionssuch as ice and dust. Alwayswash the vehicle’s chrome withsoap and water after exposure.

Notice: Using strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, coulddamage the surface of thewheel(s). The repairs would notbe covered by the warranty.Use only approved cleaners onaluminum or chrome-platedwheels.

The surface of these wheels issimilar to the painted surface of yourvehicle. Do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,abrasive cleaners, cleaners withacid, or abrasive cleaning brusheson them because you could damagethe surface. Do not use chromepolish on aluminum wheels.

Notice: Using chrome polish onaluminum wheels could damagethe wheels. The repairs would notbe covered by the warranty.Use chrome polish on chromewheels only.


Use chrome polish only onchrome-plated wheels, but avoidany painted surface of the wheel,and buff off immediately afterapplication.

Notice: Driving the vehiclethrough an automatic car washthat has silicone carbide tirecleaning brushes, could damagethe aluminum or chrome-platedwheels. The repairs would not becovered by the warranty. Neverdrive a vehicle equipped withaluminum or chrome-platedwheels through an automatic carwash that uses silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes.

Windshield and Wiper BladesClean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean the rubber blades using a lintfree cloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning the blades.

Bugs, road grime, sap, and a buildupof vehicle wash/wax treatments maycause wiper streaking. Replace thewiper blades if they are worn ordamaged.

Wipers can be damaged by:

• Extreme dusty conditions

• Sand and salt

• Heat and sun

• Snow and ice, without properremoval

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brushwith tire cleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-basedtire dressing products on thevehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applyinga tire dressing, always wipe offany overspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired or replacedto restore corrosion protection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintainingthe vehicle warranty.

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deepscratches in the finish should berepaired right away. Bare metal willcorrode quickly and may develop intomajor repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can berepaired with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer/retailer.Larger areas of finish damage can becorrected in your dealer’s/retailer’sbody and paint shop.


Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice andsnow removal and dust control cancollect on the underbody. If theseare not removed, corrosion and rustcan develop on the underbodyparts such as fuel lines, frame,floor pan, and exhaust systemeven though they have corrosionprotection.

At least every spring, flush thesematerials from the underbodywith plain water. Clean any areaswhere mud and debris can collect.Dirt packed in close areas ofthe frame should be loosened beforebeing flushed. Your dealer/retaileror an underbody car washingsystem can do this.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmosphericconditions can create a chemicalfallout. Airborne pollutants canfall upon and attack painted surfaceson the vehicle. This damage cantake two forms: blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface.

Although no defect in the paint jobcauses this, we will repair, at nocharge to the owner, the surfaces ofnew vehicles damaged by thisfallout condition within 12 months or12,000 miles (20 000 km) ofpurchase, whichever occurs first.


Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) ..................10-1

Service PartsIdentification Label ...........10-1

Capacities andSpecificationsCapacities andSpecifications ..................10-2

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for thevehicle. It appears on a plate inthe front corner of the instrumentpanel, on the driver side. It canbe seen through the windshield fromoutside the vehicle. The VIN alsoappears on the Vehicle Certificationand Service Parts labels and thecertificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN isthe engine code. This code helpsidentify the vehicle’s engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specificationson page 10-2 for the vehicle’sengine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label is on the trunk floor. It isvery helpful if parts need to beordered. The label has the followinginformation:

• Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and specialequipment

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.

Technical Data 10-1

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See “Fluids and Lubricants” inthe index of the “Limited Warranty, Maintenance and Owner Assistance Information” manual.

Application

Capacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant

For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant caution label locatedunder the hood. See your dealer/retailer for moreinformation.

Cooling System

Automatic Transmission 6.2 qt 5.9 L

Manual Transmission 7.3 qt 6.9 L

Engine Oil with Filter 4.8 qt 4.5 L

Fuel Tank 11.9 gal 45.0 L

10-2 Technical Data

Application

Capacities

English Metric

Transmission Fluid

Automatic Transmission 4.2 qt 4.0 L

Manual Transmission 1.6 qt 1.5 L

Wheel Bolt Torque 81 lb ft 110 Y

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual.

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

1.8L L4 1 AutomaticManual 0.035 in (0.90 mm)

Technical Data 10-3

✍ NOTES

10-4 Technical Data

Service andMaintenance

Service and MaintenanceIntroduction .......................11-1MaintenanceRequirements ..................11-1

Your Vehicle and theEnvironment ....................11-2

Using the MaintenanceSchedule .........................11-2

Scheduled Maintenance ....11-3Additional RequiredServices ..........................11-6

Maintenance Footnotes .....11-8Owner Checks andServices ..........................11-9

At Each Fuel Fill ...............11-9

At Least Once a Month ...11-10At Least Once a Year .....11-10Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants ...............11-12

MaintenanceReplacement Parts ........11-14

Engine Drive BeltRouting ..........................11-15

Maintenance Record ........11-16

Service andMaintenance

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil atthe proper level and change asrecommended.

MaintenanceRequirementsNotice: Maintenance intervals,checks, inspections, replacementparts, and recommended fluidsand lubricants as prescribedin this manual are necessary tokeep this vehicle in good workingcondition. Any damage causedby failure to follow scheduledmaintenance might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Service and Maintenance 11-1

Your Vehicle and theEnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not onlyhelps to keep the vehicle in goodworking condition, but also helps theenvironment. All recommendedmaintenance is important. Impropervehicle maintenance can evenaffect the quality of the air webreathe. Improper fluid levels or thewrong tire inflation can increasethe level of emissions from thevehicle. To help protect theenvironment, and to keep thevehicle in good condition, be sureto maintain the vehicle properly.

Using the MaintenanceScheduleWe want to help keep this vehicle ingood working condition. But wedo not know exactly how youwill drive it. You might drive veryshort distances only a few times aweek. Or you might drive longdistances all the time in very hot,dusty weather. You might usethe vehicle in making deliveries.Or you might drive it to work, to doerrands, or in many other ways.

Because of all the differentways people use their vehicles,maintenance needs vary. You mightneed more frequent checks andreplacements. So please read thefollowing and note how you drive.If you have any questions onhow to keep the vehicle in goodcondition, see your dealer/retailer.

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargowithin recommended limits on theTire and Loading Informationlabel. See Loading the Vehicleon page 8-30.

• are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

• use the recommended fuel.See Gasoline Octane onpage 8-34.

The services in ScheduledMaintenance on page 11-3 shouldbe performed when indicated.See Additional Required Serviceson page 11-6 and MaintenanceFootnotes on page 11-8 for furtherinformation.

11-2 Service and Maintenance

{ CAUTION

Performing maintenance work ona vehicle can be dangerous.In trying to do some jobs, you canbe seriously injured. Do your ownmaintenance work only if youhave the required know-how andthe proper tools and equipmentfor the job. If you have any doubt,see your dealer/retailer to have aqualified technician do the work.See Doing Your Own ServiceWork on page 9-4.

Some maintenance services can becomplex. So, unless you aretechnically qualified and have thenecessary equipment, haveyour dealer/retailer do these jobs.

When you go to your dealer/retailerfor service, trained and supportedservice technicians will performthe work using genuine parts.

To purchase service information,see Service Publications OrderingInformation on page 12-15.

Owner Checks and Services onpage 11-9 tells what shouldbe checked, when to check it, andwhat can easily be done to helpkeep the vehicle in good condition.

The proper replacement parts,fluids, and lubricants to useare listed in Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11-12and Maintenance ReplacementParts on page 11-14. Whenthe vehicle is serviced, make surethese are used. All parts shouldbe replaced and all necessaryrepairs done before you or anyoneelse drives the vehicle. Werecommend the use of genuineparts from your dealer/retailer.

Scheduled MaintenanceWhen the letters InSP appear inthe odometer display, serviceis required for the vehicle. Have thevehicle serviced as soon aspossible within the mileage indicatedon the display. The engine oil andfilter must be changed at least oncea year and at this time the systemmust be reset. Your dealer/retailerhas trained service technicianswho will perform this work usinggenuine parts and reset the system.

If the engine oil life system isever reset accidentally, servicethe vehicle within 3,000 miles(5 000 km) since the last service.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 9-9 for information on the oillife system and resetting the system.


When InSP appears, certainservices, checks, and inspectionsare required. Required servicesare described in the followingfor “Maintenance I” and“Maintenance II.” Generally, it isrecommended that the first servicebe Maintenance I, the secondservice be Maintenance II, and thenalternate Maintenance I and

Maintenance II thereafter. However,in some cases, Maintenance IImight be required more often.

Maintenance I — UseMaintenance I if InSP displayswithin 10 months since the vehiclewas purchased or Maintenance IIwas performed.

Maintenance II — UseMaintenance II if the previousservice performed wasMaintenance I. Always useMaintenance II whenever the lettersInSP display 10 months or moresince the last service or if InSP hasnot come on at all for one year.

Scheduled Maintenance

Service Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 9-7. Reset oil life system.See Engine Oil Life System on page 9-9. An Emission Control Service. • •

Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (a). • •

Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 9-11. See footnote (b). •

Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 9-52 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Monthon page 11-10.

• •


Scheduled Maintenance (cont’d)

Service Maintenance I Maintenance II

Inspect brake system. See footnote (c). • •

Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid asneeded. • •

Perform any needed additional services. See Additional Required Serviceson page 11-6. • •

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (d). •

Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (e). •

Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (f). •

Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (g). •

Lubricate body components. See footnote (h). •


Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles(kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks. • • • • • •Inspect exhaust system for loose ordamaged components. • • • • • •

Replace engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 9-11.

• • •

Replace passenger compartmentair filter. • • • • • •

Change automatic transmission fluid(severe service). See footnote (i). • • •

Change automatic transmission fluid(normal service). •

Replace spark plugs.An Emission Control Service.Not to exceed 35,000 miles (56 000 km).

• • • • • •


Additional Required Services (cont’d)

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Engine cooling system service (or everyfive years, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service.See footnote (j).

•

Solid lifter tappet adjustment (or every10 years, whichever occurs first).See footnote (m).Not to exceed 90,000 miles (144 000 km).

• •

Replace timing belt and tensioner(or every 10 years, whicheveroccurs first). See footnote (m).Not to exceed 100,000 miles (160 000 km).

• •

Inspect engine accessory drive belt(or every two years, whichever occursfirst). An Emission Control Service.See footnote (k).Not to exceed 36,000 miles (58 000 km).

• • • • • •

Change brake and clutch hydraulic fluid ata regular maintenance service everytwo years. See footnote (l).


Maintenance Footnotes(a) A fluid loss in any vehicle systemcould indicate a problem. Have thesystem inspected and repairedand the fluid level checked. Add fluidif needed.

(b) If driving regularly under dustyconditions or in high-pollutedregions, replace the filter at eachengine oil change.

(c) Inspect brake lines and hoses forproper hook-up, binding, leaks,cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect discbrake pads for wear and rotors forsurface condition. Inspect otherbrake parts, including calipers,parking brake, etc.

(d) Inspect front and rear suspensionand steering system for damaged,loose, or missing parts or signs ofwear. Inspect power steering cablesfor proper hook-up, binding, cracks,chafing, etc. Inspect power steeringhydraulic lines and hoses for properhook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,chafing, etc.

(e) Inspect hoses and have themreplaced if they are cracked,swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect allpipes, fittings and clamps; replacewith genuine parts as needed.To help ensure proper operation,a pressure test of the cooling systemand pressure cap and cleaningthe outside of the radiator andair conditioning condenser isrecommended at least once a year.

(f) Inspect wiper blades for wear,cracking, or contamination.Clean the windshield and wiperblades, if contaminated. Replacewiper blades that are worn ordamaged. See Windshield WiperBlade Replacement on page 9-21and “Windshield and Wiper Blades”in Exterior Cleaning on page 9-76.

(g) Make sure the safety beltreminder light and safety beltassemblies are working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system parts.If you see anything that might keepa safety belt system from doing

its job, have it repaired. Have anytorn or frayed safety belts replaced.Also see Airbag System Checkon page 1-37.

(h) Lubricate all key lock cylinders,door hinges and latches, hoodhinges and latches, and trunk lidhinges and latches. More frequentlubrication may be requiredwhen exposed to a corrosiveenvironment. Applying siliconegrease on weatherstrips with a cleancloth will make them last longer,seal better, and not stick or squeak.

(i) Change automatic transmissionfluid if the vehicle is mainly drivenunder one or more of theseconditions:− In heavy city traffic where the

outside temperature regularlyreaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer

towing.− Uses such as found in taxi, police,

or delivery service.


(j) Drain, flush, and refill coolingsystem. This service can becomplex; you should have yourdealer/retailer perform this service.See Engine Coolant on page 9-16for what to use. Inspect hoses.Clean radiator, condenser, pressurecap, and filler neck. Pressure test thecooling system and pressure cap.

(k) Inspect belt for fraying, excessivecracks, or obvious damage. Replacebelt if necessary.

(l) Drain, flush, and refill brake/clutchhydraulic system at a regular serviceinterval (I or II) every two years.This service can be complex; youshould have your dealer/retailerperform this service. See Brakeson page 9-22.

(m) This service can be complex;you should have your dealer/retailerperform this service.

Owner Checks andServicesThese owner checks and servicesshould be performed at the intervalsspecified to help ensure vehiclesafety, dependability, andemission control performance.Your dealer/retailer can assist withthese checks and services.

Be sure any necessary repairs arecompleted at once. Whenever anyfluids or lubricants are added tothe vehicle, make sure they arethe proper ones, as shown inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12.

At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform theseunderhood checks at each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level Check

Notice: It is important to checkthe engine oil regularly andkeep it at the proper level.Failure to keep the engine oilat the proper level can causedamage to the engine not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Check the engine oil level andadd the proper oil if necessary.See Engine Oil on page 9-7.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant leveland add DEX-COOL® coolantmixture if necessary. See EngineCoolant on page 9-16.

Windshield Washer FluidLevel CheckCheck the windshield washer fluidlevel in the windshield washerfluid reservoir and add the properfluid if necessary.


At Least Once a MonthTire Inflation CheckInspect the vehicle’s tires and makesure they are inflated to the correctpressures. Do not forget to checkthe spare tire. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 9-47. Check tomake sure the spare tire is storedsecurely. See Changing a Flat Tireon page 9-61.

Tire Wear InspectionTire rotation may be required forhigh mileage highway drivers prior tothe Engine Oil Life System servicenotification. Check the tires forwear and, if necessary, rotate thetires. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 9-52.

At Least Once a YearStarter Switch Check

{ CAUTION

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle could movesuddenly. If the vehicle moves,you or others could be injured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parkingbrake and the regular brake.See Parking Brake on page 8-10.Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if it starts.

3. Try to start the engine ineach gear. The vehicle shouldstart only in P (Park) orN (Neutral). If the vehicle startsin any other position, contactyour dealer/retailer for service.

Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control System Check

{ CAUTION

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle could movesuddenly. If the vehicle moves,you or others could be injured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.See Parking Brake on page 8-10.Be ready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition to ON/RUN, but do notstart the engine. Without applyingthe regular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer/retailer for service.


Ignition Transmission LockCheckWhile parked, and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF in each shift leverposition.

• The ignition should turn toLOCK/OFF only when the shiftlever is in P (Park).

• The ignition key should come outonly in LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer/retailer if serviceis required.

Parking Brake and AutomaticTransmission P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ CAUTION

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’sholding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly removefoot pressure from the regularbrake pedal. Do this until thevehicle is held by the parkingbrake only.

• To check the P (Park)mechanism’s holding ability:With the engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer/retailer ifservice is required.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plainwater to flush any corrosivematerials from the underbody.Take care to clean thoroughlyany areas where mud and otherdebris can collect.


Recommended Fluids and LubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from yourdealer/retailer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meets GM Standard GM6094M and displays theAmerican Petroleum Institute Certified for Gasoline Engines starburstsymbol. To determine the proper viscosity for your vehicle’s engine,see Engine Oil on page 9-7.

Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL® Coolant.See Engine Coolant on page 9-16.

Hydraulic Brake/Clutch System Hydraulic Brake Fluid. Use only GM Part No. U.S. 88958860,in Canada 88901244, Super DOT-4 brake fluid.

Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Power Steering System GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88901975,in Canada 88901976).

Automatic Transmission Use only T-IV Automatic Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88900925,in Canada 22689186).


Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Manual Transmission Manual Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88862472,in Canada 88862473).

Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Hood Latch Assembly, SecondaryLatch, Pivots, Spring Anchor,

and Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in Canada992723) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LBor GC-LB.

Hood and Door Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 109435474).

Weatherstrip ConditioningWeatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 3634770, in Canada 10953518)or Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,in Canada 992887).


Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.

Part Part Numbers ACDelco Part Numbers

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 9117557 —

Engine Oil Filter 93185674 —

Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element

Pollen Filter 13175553 —

Carbon Filter 13175554 —

Spark Plugs 93176801 —

Wiper Blades

Front Wiper Kit 93187384 —

Rear Wiper 93189239 —


Engine Drive Belt Routing


Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 11-1. Any additionalinformation from Owner Checks and Services on page 11-9 can be added on the following record pages. You shouldretain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or

Maintenance II Services Performed


Maintenance Record (cont’d)




CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure .......................12-1

Online Owner Center ........12-4Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)Users ..............................12-5

Customer AssistanceOffices ............................12-5

GM MobilityReimbursementProgram ..........................12-6

Roadside AssistanceProgram ..........................12-6

Scheduling ServiceAppointments ..................12-8

Courtesy Transportation ....12-9Collision DamageRepair ...........................12-10

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernment ...................12-14

Reporting SafetyDefects to theCanadian Government ...12-14

Reporting SafetyDefects to Saturn ..........12-14

Service PublicationsOrdering Information ......12-15

Vehicle Data Recordingand PrivacyVehicle Data Recordingand Privacy ...................12-16

Event Data Recorders .....12-16OnStar® ..........................12-17Navigation System ...........12-17Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) .......12-17

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your retailer and toSaturn. Together we are committedto providing our customers withunparalleled service, before, during,and after the purchase of aSaturn vehicle, for total customersatisfaction. We call this the SaturnDifference. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle are resolvedby the retailer’s sales or servicedepartments. If, for any reason, yourownership experience falls belowyour expectations, we suggestyou take the following action:

STEP ONE: Contact the RetailCustomer Assistance Liaison. Anymember of the retail managementteam has the authority and thedesire to resolve your concerns.Normally, concerns can be quicklyresolved at this level.

Customer Information 12-1

STEP TWO: Should you needadditional assistance, in the U.S.,contact the Saturn CustomerAssistance Center by calling1-800-553-6000. In Canada, call theSaturn Customer CommunicationCentre at 1-800-263-1999. A SaturnCustomer Assistance Centerteam member will handle your calland assist in providing productand warranty information, thenearest retailer location, roadsideassistance, brochures, literature anddiscuss any concerns you may have.

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to giveyour inquiry prompt attention.Please have the following informationavailable to give the CustomerAssistance Representative:

• Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN). This 17-digitnumber can be found on thevehicle registration or title, on theupper driver side corner of theinstrument panel, or on yourroadside assistance key card.

• The name of your selling andservicing retail facility.

• Vehicle delivery date and presentmileage.

• Your daytime and evening phonenumbers.

When contacting Saturn, pleaseremember that your concernwill likely be resolved at a retailer’sfacility. That is why we suggestyou follow Step One first.

STEP THREE (U.S. Owners):Both Saturn and its retailersare committed to making sure youare completely satisfied withyour Saturn vehicle. However, if youcontinue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two,Saturn and its retailers offer theadditional assistance of a neutralparty through our voluntaryparticipation in a mediation/arbitration program called BetterBusiness Bureau (BBB) Auto Line.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. This program isavailable at no cost to you, ourcustomer.

Although you may be required toresort to this informal disputeresolution program prior to filing acourt action, use of the program isfree of charge and your case isgenerally heard within 40 days. If youdo not agree with the decision givenin your case, you can reject it andproceed with any other venue forrelief available to you.

12-2 Customer Information

Contact the BBB Auto Line Programby using the toll-free telephonenumber or by writing them at thefollowing address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better BusinessBureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage and otherfactors. Saturn Corporation reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.

STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):

General Motors Participation inthe Mediation/Arbitration Program

In the event that you do not feelyour concerns have been addressedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps 1 and 2, GeneralMotors of Canada Limited hascommitted to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involvedby an impartial third party arbiter,and may include an informalhearing before the arbiter.The program is designed so that theentire dispute settlement process,from the time you file your complaintto the final decision, should becompleted in approximately 70 days.We believe our impartial programoffers advantages over courtsin most jurisdictions because it isinformal, quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.Alternatively, you may call theSaturn Customer CommunicationCentre, 1-800-263-1999, or you maywrite to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

Your inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).


Online Owner CenterOnline Owner Center (U.S.) —www.gmownercenter.com/saturnInformation and services customizedfor your specific vehicle — all inone convenient place.

• Digital owner manual, warrantyinformation, and more

• Online service and maintenancerecords

• Find Saturn retailers for servicenationwide

• Exclusive privileges and offers

• Recall notices for your specificvehicle

• OnStar® and GM CardmemberServices Earnings summaries

Other Helpful Links:

Saturn − www.saturn.com

Saturn Merchandise —www.saturncollection.com

Help Center —www.saturn.com/helpcenter

• FAQ

• Contact Us

My GM Canada (Canada) —www.gm.caMy GM Canada is apassword-protected section ofwww.gm.ca where you can saveinformation on GM vehicles,get personalized offers, and usehandy tools and forms withgreater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable toolsand services you will have access to:

• My Showroom: Find and saveinformation on vehicles andcurrent offers in your area.

• My Dealers/Retailers: Savedetails such as address andphone number for each of yourpreferred GM dealers/retailers.

• My Driveway: Access quick linksto parts and service estimates,check trade-in values, or schedulea service appointment by addingthe vehicles you own to yourdriveway profile.

• My Preferences: Manage yourprofile and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up, visit the My GM Canadasection within www.gm.ca.


Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist owners who have hearingdifficulties, Saturn has installedspecial TDD (TelecommunicationDevices for the Deaf) equipmentin its Saturn Customer AssistanceCenter.

Any hearing or speech-impairedcustomer who has access to aTDD or to a conventionalText Telephone (TTY) cancommunicate with Saturn by dialing1-800-TDD-6000. TTY users inCanada may dial 1-800-263-3830.

Customer AssistanceOfficesSaturn encourages customers tocall the toll-free number forassistance. If a customer wishes towrite to Saturn, the letter shouldbe addressed to:

Saturn Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33173Detroit, MI 48232-5173

1-800-553-60001-800-833-6000(For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-553-6000

In Canada, write to:

Saturn Customer CommunicationCentreGeneral Motors of Canada Ltd.CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

GMcanada.com1-800-263-19991-800-263-3830(For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800


GM MobilityReimbursement Program

This program, available to qualifiedapplicants, can reimburse you up to$1,000 toward eligible aftermarketdriver or passenger adaptiveequipment you may require for yourvehicle such as hand controls,wheelchair/scooter lifts, etc.

The offer is available for a limitedperiod of time from the date ofvehicle purchase/lease.

For more details, or to determineyour vehicle’s eligibility, visityour Saturn retailer or call theSaturn Customer Assistance Centerat 1-800-553-6000. Text telephone(TTY) users, call 1-800-833-6000.

In Canada, customers may call theSaturn Customer CommunicationCentre at 1-800-263-1999.TTY users in Canada may call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgramFor U.S. purchased vehicles, call1-800-553-6000; (Text Telephone(TTY): 1-800-889-2438).

For Canadian purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for AssistanceWhen calling Roadside Assistance,have the following information ready:• Your name, home address, and

home telephone number• Telephone number of your

location• Location of the vehicle• Model, year, color, and license

plate number of the vehicle• Odometer reading, Vehicle

Identification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle

• Description of the problem

CoverageServices are provided up to5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km),whichever comes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner isnot covered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Saturn and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tomake any changes or discontinuethe Roadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

Saturn and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tolimit services or payment to anowner or driver if they decide theclaims are made too often, orthe same type of claim is mademany times.


Services Provided• Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuelfor the vehicle to get to thenearest service station.

• Lock-Out Service: Service isprovided to unlock the vehicleif you are locked out. A remoteunlock may be available if youhave OnStar®. For securityreasons, the driver must presentidentification before this serviceis given.

• Emergency Tow From a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest Saturn retailer forwarranty service, or if the vehiclewas in a crash and cannot bedriven. Assistance is alsogiven when the vehicle is stuckin sand, mud, or snow.

• Flat Tire Change: Service isprovided to change a flat tirewith the spare tire. The spare tire,if equipped, must be in goodcondition and properly inflated.It is the owner’s responsibility forthe repair or replacement ofthe tire if it is not covered by thewarranty.

• Battery Jump Start: Service isprovided to jump start a deadbattery.

• Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: If your trip isinterrupted due to a warrantyfailure, incidental expenses maybe reimbursed during the 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km)Powertrain warranty period.Items considered are hotel,meals, and rental car.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance• Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.

• Legal fines.

• Mounting, dismounting orchanging of snow tires, chains,or other traction devices.

• Towing or services for vehiclesdriven on a non-public road orhighway.


Services Specific to CanadianPurchased Vehicles• Fuel delivery: Reimbursement

is approximately $5 Canadian.Diesel fuel delivery may berestricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided throughthis service.

• Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

• Trip Routing Service: Detailedmaps of North America areprovided when requested eitherwith the most direct route orthe most scenic route. There is alimit of six requests per year.Additional travel informationis also available. Allowthree weeks for delivery.

• Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over250 kilometres from whereyour trip was started toqualify. General Motors of

Canada Limited requirespre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copyof the repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Assistanceadvisor will help you makearrangements and explain howto receive payment.

• Alternative Service:If assistance cannot beprovided right away, theRoadside Assistance advisormay give you permission to getlocal emergency road service.You will receive payment,up to $100, after sending theoriginal receipt to RoadsideAssistance. Mechanical failuresmay be covered, howeverany cost for parts and laborfor repairs not covered by thewarranty are the ownerresponsibility.

Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen your vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer/retailerand request an appointment.By scheduling a service appointmentand advising your service consultantof your transportation needs, yourdealer/retailer can help minimizeyour inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety-related. If it is, pleasecall your dealership/retailer, let themknow this, and ask for instructions.

If the dealer/retailer requestsyou to bring the vehicle for service,you are urged to do so as earlyin the work day as possible to allowfor the same day repair.


Courtesy TransportationTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingretailers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customersupport program for vehicles withthe Bumper to Bumper (BaseWarranty Coverage period inCanada), extended powertrain, andhybrid specific warranties in boththe U.S. and Canada.

Several courtesy transportationoptions are available to assistin reducing your inconveniencewhen warranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information” furnishedwith each new vehicle providesdetailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generallybe completed while you wait.However, if you are unable to wait,Saturn helps to minimize yourinconvenience by providing severaltransportation options. Dependingon the circumstances, yourretailer can offer you one of thefollowing:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferredmeans of offering CourtesyTransportation. Retailers mayprovide you with shuttle service toget you to your destination withminimal interruption of your dailyschedule. This includes one-way orround trip shuttle service withinreasonable time and distanceparameters of the retailer’s area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If your vehicle requires overnightwarranty repairs, and publictransportation is used instead of theretailer’s shuttle service, theexpense must be supported byoriginal receipts and can only be upto the maximum amount allowedby Saturn for shuttle service.In addition, for U.S. customers,should you arrange transportationthrough a friend or relative,limited reimbursement forreasonable fuel expenses may beavailable. Claim amounts shouldreflect actual costs and besupported by original receipts. Seeyour retailer for informationregarding the allowance amounts forreimbursement of fuel or othertransportation costs.


Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Your retailer may arrange to provideyou with a courtesy rental vehicle orreimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if your vehicle is keptfor an overnight warranty repair.Rental reimbursement will be limitedand must be supported by originalreceipts. This requires that you signand complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, andrental vehicle provider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card, etc.You are responsible for fuelusage charges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usagefees, excessive mileage, or rentalusage beyond the completion ofthe repair.

It may not be possible to provide alike-vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformationAll program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery retailer. Please contact yourretailer for specific informationabout availability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements will beadministered by appropriateretailer personnel.

Saturn reserves the right tounilaterally modify, change ordiscontinue Courtesy Transportationat any time and to resolve allquestions of claim eligibility pursuantto the terms and conditionsdescribed herein at its solediscretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, havethe damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish your vehicle’sresale value, and safetyperformance can be compromisedin subsequent collisions.

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which your vehiclewas originally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are your best choiceto ensure that your vehicle’sdesigned appearance, durability,and safety are preserved. The useof Genuine GM parts can helpmaintain your GM New VehicleWarranty.


Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair.These parts are typically removedfrom vehicles that were totallosses in prior crashes. In mostcases, the parts being recycled arefrom undamaged sections of thevehicle. A recycled originalequipment GM part, may be anacceptable choice to maintain yourvehicle’s originally designedappearance and safety performance,however, the history of theseparts is not known. Such parts arenot covered by your GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not coveredby that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for yourvehicle. As a result, these partsmay fit poorly, exhibit prematuredurability/corrosion problems,and may not perform properlyin subsequent collisions.

Aftermarket parts are not coveredby your GM New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, and any vehicle failurerelated to such parts are not coveredby that warranty.

Repair FacilityWe recommend that you choose acollision repair facility that meetsyour needs before you everneed collision repairs. Yourdealer/retailer may have a collisionrepair center with GM-trainedtechnicians and state of the artequipment, or be able torecommend a collision repair centerthat has GM-trained techniciansand comparable equipment.

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in yourGM vehicle with comprehensiveand collision insurance coverage.There are significant differencesin the quality of coverage affordedby various insurance policy terms.

Many insurance policies providereduced protection to your GMvehicle by limiting compensationfor damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts.Some insurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collisionparts. When purchasing insurance,we recommend that you assureyour vehicle will be repaired withGM original equipment collisionparts. If such insurance coverage isnot available from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you tohave insurance that assuresrepairs with Genuine GM OriginalEquipment Manufacturer (OEM)parts or Genuine Manufacturerreplacement parts. Read your leasecarefully, as you may be chargedat the end of your lease for poorquality repairs.


If a Crash OccursHere is what to do if you areinvolved in a crash.

• Check to make sure that you areall right. If you are uninjured,make sure that no one else inyour vehicle, or the other vehicle,is injured.

• If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help.Do not leave the scene of a crashuntil all matters have beentaken care of. Move your vehicleonly if its position puts you indanger or you are instructed tomove it by a police officer.

• Give only the necessary andrequested information topolice and other parties involvedin the crash. Do not discussyour personal condition, mentalframe of mind, or anythingunrelated to the crash. This willhelp guard against post-crashlegal action.

• If you need roadside assistance,call GM Roadside Assistance.See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 12-6 for moreinformation.

• If your vehicle cannot be driven,know where the towing servicewill be taking it. Get a cardfrom the tow truck operator orwrite down the driver’s name, theservice’s name, and the phonenumber.

• Remove any valuables from yourvehicle before it is towed away.Make sure this includes yourinsurance information andregistration if you keep theseitems in your vehicle.

• Gather the important informationyou will need from the otherdriver. Things like name,address, phone number, driver’s

license number, vehicle licenseplate, vehicle make, modeland model year, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN),insurance company and policynumber, and a generaldescription of the damage to theother vehicle.

• If possible, call your insurancecompany from the scene ofthe crash. They will walkyou through the information theywill need. If they ask for apolice report, phone or go to thepolice department headquartersthe next day and you can geta copy of the report for a nominalfee. In some states/provinceswith “no fault” insurance laws, areport may not be necessary.This is especially true if there areno injuries and both vehiclesare driveable.


• Choose a reputable collisionrepair facility for your vehicle.Whether you select adealer/retailer or a privatecollision repair facility to fix thedamage, make sure you arecomfortable with them.Remember, you will have to feelcomfortable with their workfor a long time.

• Once you have an estimate,read it carefully and makesure you understand what workwill be performed on yourvehicle. If you have a question,ask for an explanation. Reputableshops welcome this opportunity.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair ProcessIn the event that your vehiclerequires damage repairs, GMrecommends that you take an activerole in its repair. If you have apre-determined repair facilityof choice, take your vehicle there,or have it towed there. Specify tothe facility that any requiredreplacement collision parts beoriginal equipment parts, either newGenuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be coveredby your GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss thiswith your repair professional, andinsist on Genuine GM parts.

Remember if your vehicle is leasedyou may be obligated to havethe vehicle repaired with GenuineGM parts, even if your insurancecoverage does not pay the full cost.

If another party’s insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accepta repair valuation based onthat insurance company’s collisionpolicy repair limits, as you haveno contractual limits with thatcompany. In such cases, you canhave control of the repair andparts choices as long as cost stayswithin reasonable limits.


Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which couldcause a crash or could causeinjury or death, you shouldimmediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA), inaddition to notifying SaturnCorporation.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it could open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in agroup of vehicles, it could ordera recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourretailer or Saturn Corporation.

To contact NHTSA, call theVehicle Safety Hotline toll-freeat 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go toSafercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington D.C., 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from Safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that your vehicle hasa safety defect, notify TransportCanada immediately, in addition tonotifying General Motors ofCanada Limited. Call them at1-800-333-0510 or write to:Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defectsto SaturnIn addition to notifying NHTSA(or Transport Canada) in a situationlike this, please notify Saturn.

Call 1-800-553-6000, or write:

Saturn Corporation100 Saturn ParkwayMail Drop 371-999-S24Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500

In Canada, call 1-800-263-1999,or write:

Saturn Customer CommunicationCentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7


Service PublicationsOrdering InformationService ManualsA variety of publications areavailable to you. Saturn servicemanuals are written for trainedtechnicians, and in some cases,specialized tools and equipment arenecessary to complete certainrepairs. However, the manuals areavailable to owners who eitherhave the training, or wish to gain agreater understanding of thetechnical aspect of their Saturn.

For additional publicationsinformation or to order publicationsin the United States, call tollfree 1-800-2-SATURN or visitSaturn-publications.com to orderon-line.

In Canada, Saturn service manualsare available by calling toll free1-800-551-4123.

Owner PublicationsInformation on how to obtainproduct bulletins and as describedbelow is applicable only in thefifty U.S. states and the District ofColumbia, and only for cars andlight trucks with a Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) lessthan 10,000 pounds (4 536 kg).Copies of individual bulletinsare also at your participating Saturnretailer. You can ask to see them.

In Canada, information relatingto product service bulletins can beobtained by contacting yourSaturn retailer.

Service BulletinsSaturn regularly sends its retailersuseful service bulletins about Saturnproducts. Saturn monitors productperformance in the field. We thenprepare bulletins for servicingour products better. You can getthese bulletins, too.

Bulletins cover various subjects.Some pertain to the proper useand care of your vehicle.Some describe costly repairs.Others describe inexpensive repairswhich, if done on time with thelatest parts, may avoid future costlyrepairs.

Some bulletins tell a technician howto repair a new or unexpectedcondition. Others describe a quickerway to fix your vehicle. They canhelp a technician service yourvehicle better.

Most bulletins apply to conditionsaffecting a small number of vehicles.Your Saturn retailer or a qualifiedtechnician may have to determine ifa specific bulletin applies to yourvehicle. To order Saturn bulletins,call Saturn Publications at1-800-2-SATURN or visitsaturn-publications.com to orderonline.


Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyYour Saturn vehicle has a numberof sophisticated computers thatrecord information about thevehicle’s performance and how it isdriven. For example, your vehicleuses computer modules to monitorand control engine and transmissionperformance, to monitor theconditions for airbag deploymentand deploy airbags in a crash and,if so equipped, to provide antilockbraking to help the driver control thevehicle. These modules may storedata to help your dealer/retailertechnician service your vehicle.Some modules may also store dataabout how you operate the vehicle,such as rate of fuel consumption oraverage speed. These modules mayalso retain the owner’s personalpreferences, such as radio pre-sets,seat positions, and temperaturesettings.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle has an Event DataRecorder (EDR). The main purposeof an EDR is to record, in certaincrash or near crash-like situations,such as an airbag deploymentor hitting a road obstacle, data thatwill assist in understanding howa vehicle’s systems performed.The EDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics andsafety systems for a short periodof time, typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designedto record such data as:

• How various systems in yourvehicle were operating

• Whether or not the driver andpassenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened

• How far, if at all, the driver waspressing the accelerator and/orbrake pedal

• How fast the vehicle was traveling

This data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstancesin which crashes and injuries occur.

Important: EDR data is recordedby your vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no datais recorded by the EDR undernormal driving conditions and nopersonal data (e.g., name, gender,age, and crash location) isrecorded. However, other parties,such as law enforcement, couldcombine the EDR data with the typeof personally identifying dataroutinely acquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required,and access to the vehicle or theEDR is needed. In addition tothe vehicle manufacturer, otherparties, such as law enforcement,that have the special equipment, canread the information if they haveaccess to the vehicle or the EDR.


Saturn will not access this data orshare it with others except: withthe consent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request of police orsimilar government office; as part ofSaturn’s defense of litigationthrough the discovery process; or,as required by law. Data that Saturncollects or receives may also beused for Saturn research needs ormay be made available to othersfor research purposes, wherea need is shown and the data is nottied to a specific vehicle or vehicleowner.

OnStar®

If your vehicle has OnStar and yousubscribe to the OnStar services,please refer to the OnStar Termsand Conditions for informationon data collection and use. See alsoOnStar® System on page 4-38 inthis manual for more information.

Navigation SystemIf your vehicle has a navigationsystem, use of the systemmay result in the storage ofdestinations, addresses, telephonenumbers, and other trip information.Refer to the navigation systemoperating manual for informationon stored data and for deletioninstructions.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such astire pressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniences suchas key fobs for remote doorlocking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garagedoor openers. RFID technology inSaturn vehicles does not useor record personal information orlink with any other Saturn systemcontaining personal information.


✍ NOTES


AAccessories and

Modifications ...................... 9-3Accessory Power Outlets ...... 4-10Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .... 1-36Additives, Fuel ..................... 8-34Add-On Electrical

Equipment ....................... 9-34Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ....... 9-11Air Conditioning ..................... 7-1Airbag

Passenger StatusIndicator ....................... 4-15

Readiness Light ................ 4-14System, Replacing Parts

After a Crash ................ 1-37Airbag System ..................... 1-24

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-EquippedVehicle ........................ 1-36

Check ............................. 1-37How Does an Airbag

Restrain? ..................... 1-28Passenger Sensing

System ........................ 1-30

Airbag System (cont.)Servicing Your

Airbag-EquippedVehicle ........................ 1-35

What Makes an AirbagInflate? ........................ 1-28

What Will You See Afteran Airbag Inflates? ........ 1-29

When Should an AirbagInflate? ........................ 1-27

Where Are the Airbags? ..... 1-26Antenna, Fixed Mast ............ 6-24Antilock Brake

System (ABS) .................. 8-18Antilock Brake, System

Warning Light ................... 4-17Appearance Care

Chemical Paint Spotting ..... 9-80Exterior Cleaning .............. 9-76Finish Damage ................. 9-79Interior Cleaning ............... 9-73Sheet Metal Damage ........ 9-79Underbody Maintenance .... 9-80

Appointments, SchedulingService ........................... 12-8

Audio System ........................ 6-1Audio Steering Wheel

Controls ....................... 6-23Fixed Mast Antenna .......... 6-24Radio Reception ............... 6-24Theft-Deterrent Feature ...... 6-23

Audio System(s) .................... 6-2Automatic Transmission

Fluid ............................... 9-12Operation .......................... 8-6

BBattery ............................... 9-25

Run-Down Protection .......... 5-4Brake Fluid ......................... 9-22Brakes ............................... 9-22

System Warning Light ....... 4-16Braking ............................... 8-17Break-In, New Vehicle ............ 8-2Bulb Replacement

Daytime Running Lamp ....... 5-2Bulb Replacement

Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) ........ 9-29

Fog Lamp ......................... 5-2Front Turn Signal Lamps ... 9-28

INDEX i-1

Bulb Replacement (cont.)Halogen Bulbs .................. 9-28Headlamp Aiming .............. 9-26Headlamps ...................... 9-28License Plate Lamps ......... 9-33Replacement Bulbs ........... 9-34Taillamps ................. 9-30, 9-32

Buying New Tires ................. 9-54

CCalifornia Fuel ..................... 8-34California Perchlorate

Materials Requirements ....... 9-3California Proposition 65

Warning ............................ 9-3Canadian Owners ..................... iiCapacities and

Specifications ................... 10-2Carbon Monoxide ......... 8-14, 8-27Care, Safety Belts ................ 1-23Cargo Cover ......................... 3-2Cargo Tie Downs ................... 3-2Cautions and Notices ............... iiiCenter High-Mounted

Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........... 9-29

Chains, Tire ........................ 9-60Charging System Light .......... 4-16Check

Engine Lamp ................... 4-18Chemical Paint Spotting ........ 9-80Child Restraints

Child Restraint Systems ..... 1-43Infants and Young

Children ....................... 1-40Lower Anchors and

Tethers for Children ....... 1-46Older Children .................. 1-38Securing .................. 1-51, 1-53Where to Put the

Restraint ...................... 1-44Cleaning

Exterior ........................... 9-76Interior ............................ 9-73Underbody Maintenance .... 9-80

Climate Control System .......... 7-1Outlet Adjustment ............... 7-4

Clutch, Hydraulic .................. 9-12Collision Damage Repair ..... 12-10Compact Spare Tire ............. 9-68Content Theft-Deterrent .......... 2-9Control of a Vehicle .............. 8-17

CoolantEngine ............................ 9-16Engine Temperature

Warning Light ............... 4-18Cooling System ................... 9-12Courtesy

Transportation .......... 12-5, 12-9Cruise Control ....................... 4-5Cruise Control Light .............. 4-23Cupholders ........................... 3-1Customer Information

CourtesyTransportation ....... 12-5, 12-9

Customer AssistanceOffices ......................... 12-5

Customer SatisfactionProcedure .................... 12-1

GM MobilityReimbursementProgram ....................... 12-6

Online Owner Center ......... 12-4Reporting Safety Defects

to Saturn .................... 12-14Reporting Safety Defects

to the CanadianGovernment ................ 12-14

i-2 INDEX

Customer Information (cont.)Reporting Safety Defects

to the United StatesGovernment ................ 12-14

Roadside AssistanceProgram ....................... 12-6

Service PublicationsOrdering Information ..... 12-15

DDefensive Driving ................. 8-16Delayed Headlamps ............... 5-2Doing Your Own

Service Work ..................... 9-4Dome Lamps ........................ 5-3Door

Ajar Light ........................ 4-23Locks ............................... 2-5Power Door Locks .............. 2-6Rear Door Security Locks .... 2-6

Driver InformationCenter (DIC) .................... 4-25DIC Operation and

Displays ............... 4-26, 4-32DIC Warnings and

Messages .................... 4-36

DrivingAt Night .......................... 8-23Before a Long Trip ............ 8-25Defensive ........................ 8-16Drunken .......................... 8-16Highway Hypnosis ............ 8-25Hill and Mountain Roads .... 8-26In Rain and on Wet

Roads ......................... 8-24Rocking Your Vehicle to

Get it Out .................... 8-29Winter ............................. 8-27Winter Mode Light ............ 4-22

Driving for Better FuelEconomy ......................... 8-15

EEDR ................................. 12-16Electrical System

Add-On Equipment ............ 9-34Engine Compartment

Fuse Block ................... 9-35Fuses ............................. 9-35Headlamp Wiring .............. 9-34Rear Compartment Fuse

Block ........................... 9-37

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ............... 9-11Check and Service Engine

Soon Lamp .................. 4-18Coolant ........................... 9-16Coolant Temperature

Warning Light ............... 4-18Drive Belt Routing ........... 11-15Engine Compartment

Overview ....................... 9-6Exhaust ........................... 8-14Oil ................................... 9-7Oil Life System .................. 9-9Overheating ..................... 9-18Starting ............................. 8-3

Engine Heater ....................... 8-5Entry Lighting ........................ 5-3Event Data Recorders ......... 12-16Extender, Safety Belt ............ 1-22Exterior Lamps ...................... 5-1Exterior Lamps Off

Reminder ........................ 4-23

INDEX i-3

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ............ 9-11Final Drive

End Play Measurement ....... 5-4Finish Damage .................... 9-79Fixed Mast Antenna ............. 6-24Flashers, Hazard Warning ....... 4-4Flash-to-Pass ........................ 4-8Flat Tire .............................. 9-60Flat Tire, Changing ............... 9-61Flat Tire, Storing .................. 9-66Fluid

Automatic Transmission ..... 9-12Power Steering ................. 9-20Windshield Washer ........... 9-20

Fog LampFog .................................. 5-2

Fog Lamp Light ................... 4-22Fuel ................................... 8-34

Additives ......................... 8-34California Fuel .................. 8-34Driving for Better

Economy ...................... 8-15Filling a Portable Fuel

Container ..................... 8-37

Fuel (cont.)Filling the Tank ................. 8-36Fuels in Foreign

Countries ..................... 8-35Gage .............................. 4-24Gasoline Octane ............... 8-34Gasoline Specifications ...... 8-34Low Warning Light ............ 4-24

Fuses ................................. 9-35Engine Compartment

Fuse Block ................... 9-35Rear Compartment

Fuse Block ................... 9-37

GGage

Fuel ................................ 4-24Speedometer ................... 4-13Tachometer ...................... 4-13

GasolineOctane ............................ 8-34Specifications ................... 8-34

Glove Box ............................ 3-1GM Mobility Reimbursement

Program .......................... 12-6

HHazard Warning Flashers ........ 4-4Head Restraints ..................... 1-5Headlamp

Aiming ............................ 9-26Headlamp Wiring ................. 9-34Headlamps

Bulb Replacement ............. 9-28Daytime Running Lamp ....... 5-2Delayed ............................ 5-2Exterior Lamps ................... 5-1Flash-to-Pass ..................... 4-8Front Turn Signal

Lamps ......................... 9-28Halogen Bulbs .................. 9-28High/Low Beam Changer ..... 4-8

Heater ................................. 7-1Engine .............................. 8-5

Height Adjuster, Seat .............. 1-2Highbeam On Light .............. 4-23High-Speed Operation,

Tires ............................... 9-48Highway Hypnosis ................ 8-25Hill and Mountain Roads ....... 8-26Hood

Release ............................ 9-5

i-4 INDEX

Horn .................................... 4-4How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly .......................... 1-12Hydraulic Clutch ................... 9-12

IIgnition Positions ................... 8-2Immobilizer ........................... 2-8Immobilizer Operation ............. 2-8Infants and Young Children,

Restraints ........................ 1-40Inflation - Tire Pressure ......... 9-47Instrument Panel

Brightness ......................... 5-3Cluster ............................ 4-12Overview ........................... 4-2

JJump Starting ...................... 9-69

KKeyless Entry System ............ 2-3Keys .................................... 2-2

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall .......... 9-42Lamp

Malfunction Indicator ......... 4-18Lamps

Dome ............................... 5-3Exterior, Off Reminder ....... 4-23Reading ............................ 5-3

Lap-Shoulder Belt ................ 1-18LATCH System

Replacing Parts After aCrash .......................... 1-50

LATCH System for ChildRestraints ........................ 1-46

License Plate Lamps ............ 9-33Liftgate

Carbon Monoxide ............... 2-6Light

Airbag Readiness ............. 4-14Antilock Brake System

(ABS) Warning .............. 4-17Brake System Warning ...... 4-16Charging System .............. 4-16Cruise Control .................. 4-23

Light (cont.)Door Ajar ......................... 4-23Engine Coolant

Temperature Warning ..... 4-18Fog Lamp ........................ 4-22Highbeam On ................... 4-23Low Fuel Warning ............. 4-24Low Oil Level ................... 4-22Oil Pressure ..................... 4-21Passenger Airbag Status

Indicator ....................... 4-15Safety Belt Reminders ....... 4-13Service Vehicle Soon ........ 4-23StabiliTrak® Indicator ......... 4-17Tire Pressure ................... 4-18Winter Driving Mode .......... 4-22

LightingEntry ................................ 5-3

LightsExterior Lamps ................... 5-1Flash-to-Pass ..................... 4-8High/Low Beam Changer ..... 4-8

Loading Your Vehicle ............ 8-30

INDEX i-5

LocksDoor ................................. 2-5Power Door ....................... 2-6Rear Door Security Locks .... 2-6

Loss of Control .................... 8-22Low Fuel Warning Light ........ 4-24Lower Anchors and Tethers

for Children ...................... 1-46Lumbar Seat Adjustment ......... 1-3

MMaintenance Replacement

Parts ............................. 11-14Maintenance Schedule

Additional RequiredServices ....................... 11-6

At Each Fuel Fill .............. 11-9At Least Once a

Month ........................ 11-10At Least Once a Year ...... 11-10Introduction ...................... 11-1Maintenance Footnotes ...... 11-8Maintenance Record ........ 11-16Maintenance Replacement

Parts ......................... 11-14

Maintenance Schedule (cont.)Maintenance

Requirements ............... 11-1Owner Checks and

Services ....................... 11-9Recommended Fluids

and Lubricants ............ 11-12Scheduled Maintenance ..... 11-3Using .............................. 11-2Your Vehicle and the

Environment ................. 11-2Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 4-18Manual Seats ........................ 1-2Manual Transmission

Fluid ............................... 9-12Operation .......................... 8-9

MessageDIC Warnings and

Messages .................... 4-36Mirrors

Manual Rearview Mirror ..... 2-11Outside ........................... 2-11Outside Power Mirrors ....... 2-12

MyGMLink.com .................... 12-4

NNavigation System,

Privacy .......................... 12-17New Vehicle Break-In ............. 8-2Notices and Cautions ............... iii

OOdometer ........................... 4-13Odometers, Trip ................... 4-13Off-Road Recovery ............... 8-21Oil

Engine .............................. 9-7Low Oil Level Light ........... 4-22Pressure Light .................. 4-21

Oil, Engine Oil Life System ..... 9-9Older Children, Restraints ...... 1-38OnStar, Privacy .................. 12-17OnStar® System, see

OnStar® Manual ............... 4-38Outlet Adjustment .................. 7-4Outlets

Accessory Power .............. 4-10Outside

Mirrors ............................ 2-11Power Mirrors .................. 2-12

i-6 INDEX

Owner Checks andServices .......................... 11-9

Owner Checks, Service .......... 9-4Owners, Canadian .................... ii

PPaint, Damage ..................... 9-79Park

Shifting Into ..................... 8-11Shifting Out of .................. 8-12

Park Brake .......................... 8-10Parking

Over Things That Burn ...... 8-13Parking Your Vehicle ............ 8-13Passenger Airbag Status

Indicator .......................... 4-15Passenger Sensing System ... 1-30Passing .............................. 8-22Perchlorate Materials

Requirements, California ...... 9-3Power

Door Locks ........................ 2-6Retained Accessory ............ 8-3Steering Fluid ................... 9-20Windows ......................... 2-10

Pressure Cap ...................... 9-18

Privacy ............................. 12-16Event Data Recorders ..... 12-16Navigation System .......... 12-17OnStar .......................... 12-17Radio Frequency

Identification ................ 12-17

RRadio Frequency Identification

(RFID), Privacy ............... 12-17Radio(s) ............................... 6-2Radios

Reception ........................ 6-24Theft-Deterrent ................. 6-23

Reading Lamps ..................... 5-3Rear Door Security Locks ....... 2-6Rear Heated Seats ................ 1-6Rear Seat Operation .............. 1-7Rear Windshield Washer/

Wiper ............................... 4-9Rearview Mirrors .................. 2-11Reclining Seatbacks ............... 1-3Recommended Fluids and

Lubricants ...................... 11-12Recreational Vehicle Towing ... 9-73Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System ............................. 2-3

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System, Operation .............. 2-4

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire ..... 9-63

Removing the Spare Tireand Tools ........................ 9-62

Replacement Bulbs .............. 9-34Replacing LATCH System

Parts After a Crash ........... 1-50Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government ..... 12-14Saturn ........................... 12-14United States

Government ................ 12-14Restraint System Check

Replacing Airbag SystemParts After a Crash ........ 1-37

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts After aCrash .......................... 1-23

Retained Accessory Power ...... 8-3Roadside

Assistance Program .......... 12-6Rocking Your Vehicle to

Get it Out ........................ 8-29Routing, Engine Drive Belt .... 11-15Running the Vehicle While

Parked ............................ 8-14

INDEX i-7

SSafety Belt Reminders .......... 4-13Safety Belts .......................... 1-8

Care of ........................... 1-23Check ............................. 1-22How to Wear Safety

Belts Properly ............... 1-12Lap-Shoulder Belt ............. 1-18Replacing Parts After a

Crash .......................... 1-23Safety Belt Extender ......... 1-22Safety Belt Use During

Pregnancy .................... 1-22Scheduled Maintenance ........ 11-3Seats

Head Restraints ................. 1-5Heated Seats - Rear ........... 1-6Height Adjuster .................. 1-2Lumbar Adjustment ............. 1-3Rear Seat Operation ........... 1-7Reclining Seatbacks ............ 1-3

Securing ChildRestraints ................ 1-51, 1-53

Service ................................ 9-2Accessories and

Modifications .................. 9-3Adding Equipment to the

Outside of the Vehicle ..... 9-4California Perchlorate

Materials Requirements .... 9-3California Proposition 65

Warning ......................... 9-3Doing Your Own Work ........ 9-4Engine Soon Lamp ........... 4-18Owner Checks ................... 9-4Publications Ordering

Information ................. 12-15Vehicle Soon Light ............ 4-23

Service, SchedulingAppointments ................... 12-8

Servicing YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle .... 1-35

Sheet Metal Damage ............ 9-79Shifting Into Park ................. 8-11Shifting Out of Park .............. 8-12Signals, Turn and

Lane-Change ..................... 4-8

Spare TireCompact ......................... 9-68Installing .......................... 9-63Removing ........................ 9-62Storing ............................ 9-66

Specifications, Capacities ...... 10-2Speedometer ....................... 4-13StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ..... 4-17StabiliTrak® System .............. 8-19Starting the Engine ................ 8-3Steering .............................. 8-20Steering Wheel Controls,

Audio .............................. 6-23Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ...... 4-4Storage Areas

Cupholders ........................ 3-1Glove Box ......................... 3-1Sunglasses Storage

Compartment .................. 3-1Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or

Snow .............................. 8-29Sun Visors .......................... 2-11Sunroof .............................. 2-12

i-8 INDEX

TTachometer ......................... 4-13Taillamps .................... 9-30, 9-32Theft-Deterrent, Radio ........... 6-23Theft-Deterrent Systems ......... 2-8

Content Theft-Deterrent ....... 2-9Immobilizer ........................ 2-8Immobilizer Operation ......... 2-8

Tilt Wheel ............................. 4-4Tire

Pressure Light .................. 4-18Tires .................................. 9-40

Buying New Tires ............. 9-54Chains ............................ 9-60Changing a Flat Tire ......... 9-61Compact Spare Tire .......... 9-68Different Size ................... 9-56High-Speed Operation ....... 9-48If a Tire Goes Flat ............ 9-60Inflation - Tire Pressure ..... 9-47Inspection and Rotation ..... 9-52Installing the Spare Tire ..... 9-63Pressure Monitor

Operation ..................... 9-51Pressure Monitor

System ........................ 9-49Removing the Flat Tire ...... 9-63

Tires (cont.)Removing the Spare Tire

and Tools ..................... 9-62Storing a Flat or Spare

Tire and Tools ............... 9-66Tire Sidewall Labeling ....... 9-42Tire Terminology and

Definitions .................... 9-44Uniform Tire Quality

Grading ....................... 9-57Wheel Alignment and

Tire Balance ................. 9-58Wheel Replacement .......... 9-59When It Is Time for

New Tires .................... 9-54Winter Tires ..................... 9-41

TowingRecreational Vehicle .......... 9-73Towing a Trailer ................ 9-73Your Vehicle ..................... 9-73

TractionStabiliTrak® System .......... 8-19

TransmissionFluid, Automatic ................ 9-12Fluid, Manual ................... 9-12

Transmission Operation,Automatic .......................... 8-6

Transmission Operation,Manual ............................. 8-9

Trip Odometers .................... 4-13Turn and Lane-Change

Signals ............................. 4-8Turn Signal/Multifunction

Lever ................................ 4-4

UUniform Tire Quality

Grading ........................... 9-57

VVehicle

Control ............................ 8-17Loading ........................... 8-30Parking Your .................... 8-13Running While Parked ....... 8-14Service Soon Light ........... 4-23Symbols .............................. iii

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy .......................... 12-16

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) ................... 10-1Service Parts Identification

Label ........................... 10-1Ventilation Adjustment ............. 7-4Visors ................................. 2-11

INDEX i-9

WWarning Lights, Gages and

Indicators ........................ 4-11Warnings

DIC Warnings andMessages .................... 4-36

Hazard Warning Flashers .... 4-4Wheels

Alignment and TireBalance ....................... 9-58

Different Size ................... 9-56Replacement .................... 9-59

Where to Put the Restraint .... 1-44Windows ............................. 2-10

Power ............................. 2-10

WindshieldWasher ............................. 4-9Washer Fluid .................... 9-20Wiper Blade

Replacement ................ 9-21Wipers .............................. 4-8

Windshield, Rear Washer/Wiper ............................... 4-9

Winter Driving ...................... 8-27Winter Driving Mode Light ..... 4-22Winter Tires ........................ 9-41

YYour Vehicle and the

Environment ..................... 11-2

i-10 INDEX

2009 saturn astra m - justgivemethedamnmanual.comcautions and notices a circle with a slash through...

Documents